JP2020178990A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from identifying whether a setting change is performed and capable of reducing a possibility of misrecognition of a game state.SOLUTION: Storage means can hold information for displaying again a variable display result being displayed when power supply to a game machine is stopped. The information is erased from the storage means when initialization processing is executed by initialization means and when a setting value is changed. When the initialization processing is executed by the initialization means, a common predetermined display result is displayed as initial display of identification information regardless of the set setting value. When the setting value is changed, the common predetermined display result is displayed as the initial display of the identification information regardless of the set setting value after the change.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-6

Description

The present invention controls the variable display of the identification information to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, and the variable display result is more advantageous than the specific display result. A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the derived display of a low special display result and can be set to any of a plurality of set values including the first set value and the second set value. Regarding.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). There is a machine (so-called pachinko machine) configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled).

Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine becomes advantageous for the player who is likely to win a prize, or becomes advantageous for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If it is done, a "big hit" will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, scaling or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a game machine, the identification information can be variably displayed, and the specific display result can be derived and displayed as the variable display result, so that the control can be controlled to an advantageous state which is advantageous for the player, and among a plurality of set values. Some of them are configured to be configurable. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that a jackpot state can be set when the variable display of a special symbol is stopped in a jackpot mode, and that a plurality of set values can be set. Further, Patent Document 1 describes that the set value is suggested by making the selection rate of each effect pattern different according to the set value before and after the change.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is configured to consider whether or not the setting has been changed, which setting value has been changed, and the like when the identification information is initially displayed. Absent. In such a configuration, the initial display of the identification information may identify the player whether or not the setting has been changed, or may cause the player to misunderstand that the setting is controlled in an advantageous state. ..

Therefore, the present invention provides a gaming machine capable of preventing the player from being specified whether or not the setting has been changed and reducing the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified. The purpose is to do.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs variable display of identification information (for example, a first special symbol or a second special symbol), and as a variable display result, a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol). ) Is derived and displayed, and is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and as a variable display result, a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) that is less advantageous than the specific display result. ) Is derived and displayed, and is controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state), and the first set value (for example, the set value “1”) and the second set value (for example, the set value “6”) are controlled. A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values including) and, and when it is not controlled to an advantageous state or a special state, a predetermined display different from the specific display result and the special display result as a variable display result. The result (for example, the out-of-order symbol) is derived and displayed, and the extraction means for extracting the random number value (for example, the random number for hit determination) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the process of step 072IWS044) and the extraction means are extracted. The determination means for determining the variable display result based on the random number value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display result (the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 052IWS60A and 052IWS64A) and the power supply to the game machine are stopped. Also, a storage means capable of holding the stored contents for a predetermined period (for example, RAM 102 (backup RAM)) and an initialization means for executing an initialization process for initializing the stored contents of the storage means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the process of step S21TM1410). The range of the random number value is the same regardless of the set value (for example, [0 to 65536], see FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10). , Judgment values are a specific judgment value corresponding to a specific display result (for example, a judgment value corresponding to a big hit), a special judgment value corresponding to a special display result (for example, a judgment value corresponding to a small hit), and a predetermined display. The number of specific judgment values including the predetermined judgment value corresponding to the result (for example, the judgment value corresponding to the deviation) is the first set value when the set value is the second set value. More than in some cases (for example, the set value "6" has more judgment values corresponding to the jackpot than the setting value "1". See FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10), and the special judgment value The number is common to all the set setting values (for example, the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is the same in any of the setting values "1" to "6". .. (See FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10), the number of predetermined determination values is larger when the set setting value is the first set value than when it is the second set value (for example, setting). The value "1" has a larger number of judgment values corresponding to the deviation than the set value "6" (see FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10), and the storage means is used when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Information for displaying the variable display result displayed in (for example, information that can identify the variable display result) can be retained, and the information is used when the initialization process is executed by the initialization means and is set. When the value is changed, it is erased from the storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410, and a part where the process of step S21TM1410 is executed via the setting change mode of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620), and the initialization means. When the initialization process is executed by, a common predetermined display result is displayed as the initial display of the identification information regardless of the set value (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410). (See Fig. 9-6 (2)), when the set value is changed, the common predetermined display result is displayed as the initial display of the identification information regardless of the set value set after the change (see FIG. 9-6 (2)). For example, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410 through the setting change modes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620. See FIG. 9-6 (2)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being specified whether or not the setting has been changed, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified.

(2) In order to achieve the above object, in another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention, identification information (for example, a first special symbol or a second special symbol) is variably displayed, and a specific display result (for example, a specific display result (for example) For example, a special display result (for example, a jackpot game state) that is less advantageous than a specific display result as a variable display result is controlled by controlling the player in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) based on the derived display of the jackpot symbol. , Small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, and is controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state), and the first set value (for example, set value "1") and the second set value (for example, set) are set. A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values including the value "6"), and when it is not controlled to an advantageous state or a special state, a specific display result and a special display result are displayed as variable display results. Is a different predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) derived and displayed, and an extraction means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step 072IWS044) for extracting a random number value (for example, a random number for hit determination) and an extraction means. A determination means for determining the variable display result (a part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 052IWS60A and 052IWS64A) based on the random number value extracted by the above and the determination value corresponding to the variable display result, and power supply to the gaming machine. A storage means (for example, RAM 102 (backup RAM)) capable of holding the stored contents for a predetermined period even if the storage means is stopped, and an initialization means (for example, the CPU 103) for executing an initialization process for initializing the stored contents of the storage means. The part that executes the processing of S21TM1410) and the range of the random number value are common to any of the set values (for example, [0 to 65536], FIGS. 9-9, 9). (Refer to -10), the judgment values are the specific judgment value corresponding to the specific display result (for example, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit) and the special judgment value corresponding to the special display result (for example, the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). And a predetermined determination value corresponding to a predetermined display result (for example, a determination value corresponding to a deviation), and the number of specific determination values is higher when the set setting value is the second set value. More than the case of 1 set value (for example, the set value "6" has more judgment values corresponding to the jackpot than the set value "1". See FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10). The number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (for example, the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is any of the set values "1" to "6". It is the same. (See FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10), the predetermined determination value is provided when the set value is the first set value, but is not provided when the set value is the second set value (for example,). , The setting value "1" is set to the judgment value corresponding to the loss, while the setting value "6" is not set to the judgment value corresponding to the loss. See FIG. 9-10), the storage means is , Information for displaying the variable display result that was displayed when the power supply to the game machine is stopped (for example, information that can identify the variable display result) can be held, and the information can be obtained by the initialization means. It is erased from the storage means when the initialization process is executed and when the set value is changed (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410, and the setting change mode of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620, and then step S21TM1410. When the initialization process is executed by the initialization means (the part where the process is executed), a common predetermined display result is displayed as the initial display of the identification information regardless of the set value set (for example). The part where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410. Refer to FIG. 9-6 (2)). When the set value is changed, a predetermined display result common to any of the set values set after the change is obtained. It is displayed as an initial display of the identification information (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410 through the setting change mode of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620. See FIG. 9-6 (2)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being specified whether or not the setting has been changed, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified.

(3) In the game machine according to (1) or (2) above, variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are executed. When the initialization process is executed by the initialization means in a possible gaming machine, a predetermined display result common to the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed as the initial display (for example, FIG. 9). -6 (2)) may be used.
With such a configuration, the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified can be reduced.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) A gaming machine capable of executing the above, and a common predetermined display result among a plurality of predetermined display results is displayed as an initial display in the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, FIG. 9-6 ( 2) Refer to).
With such a configuration, the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified can be reduced.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) When the set value is a specific set value (for example, the set value "6"), the first identification information is variablely displayed and the second identification information is variable. In one of the displays, the predetermined display result is not derived and displayed as the variable display result, but in the other, the predetermined display result can be derived and displayed as the variable display result (for example, in the set value "6", the second special symbol is variable. In the display, the deviation is not derived and displayed, but in the variable display of the first special symbol, the deviation can be derived and displayed).
With such a configuration, the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball device in the feature part 026IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like in a feature part 026IW. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the initial display of the 1st special symbol display device 4A and the 2nd special symbol display device 4B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the initial display of the 1st special symbol display device 4A and the 2nd special symbol display device 4B. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the initial display when the display device 026IW001 is used. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the character control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode in a big hit state and a KT state. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode in a big hit state and a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode in a big hit state and a KT state. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the variable display start waiting process.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening, so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched (so-called left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom surface member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state of being moved forward toward the front, and the opening control is executed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed so as to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom surface member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled and the large winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other prize openings such as the first start winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot game state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays the role of both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and further, frame LEDs 9 for game effects are provided around the game area. ..

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) as a confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be configured to be a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening, and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time reduction control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state (time reduction state) is executed (time reduction state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. To do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a mode designated by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). When the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the second special symbol game are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, it is possible to control the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output the right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning prize determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in a first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is controlled by the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set using random values for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes processing to decide which one to use. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation processing ends. To do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may result in a small hit and be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, the game ball is practically difficult to win in the small hit control and no particular effect is performed, so that the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control, and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, regarding the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", a process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. In addition, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The bonus control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the bonus control process flag is “0”. In this bonus control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is made, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. , End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and a drive of a movable body 32. Controls such as operation to operate various production devices are performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the LED control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 026IW)
Next, the feature unit 026IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 026IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 026IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this feature unit 026IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature unit 026IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. When the first special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is low, whereas when the second special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is high (however, it will be described later). (Except in the case of forced loss), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, the feature unit 026IW is configured so that the time required from the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. As will be described in detail later, the feature unit 026IW has a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required for the game to be played, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one The game ball can be directly entered into the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 9-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the feature unit 026IW. As shown in FIG. 9-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom surface member 052IW108 formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and the bottom surface member 052IW108 is provided in the big hit game state. By moving the bottom member 052IW108 backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In the feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the game ball winning in the large winning opening is further guided to the guidance path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guidance path 052IW100 is further branched into two paths 052IW102,103, and the game ball guided to the guidance path 052IW100 is guided to the left side path 052IW102 or the right side path 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 052IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, a V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left side path 052IW102, and when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in the open state, a game guided to the guidance path 052IW100. The ball can enter the left path 052IW102 and enter the V region 052IW104. Further, when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided by the guidance path 052IW100 enters the right path 052IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the game area.

The V-region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

Further, in the present feature unit 026IW, when controlled by the big hit game, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 after the end of the big hit game. It is controlled to a probabilistic state.

The total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In this case, it may be determined that a large winning opening / discharge mismatch error is made, and the error may be notified. In this case, since it takes some time for the winning game ball to reach the V region 052IW104 and the discharge region 052IW105 immediately before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match by the time when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it may be configured to determine a large winning opening / exit mismatch error.

(Structure of control board)
FIG. 9-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 026IW. In this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch (first count switch). In addition to the detection signals from the 23 and the second count switch 24)), the detection signals from the V area switch 052IW106 and the discharge area switch 052IW107 are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for ordinary electric accessories and the grand prize opening door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, transmission is performed to the solenoid 052IW109 for the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101.

Further, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

Further, the main substrate 11 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged in the center of the main substrate 11 and is on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged in. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various prize information such as the ratio and the combination ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information is displayed. This makes it possible to check various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and set values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), which will be described later, are changed in the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power supply switch 21TM055 that function as setting switches for this purpose are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk of the game hall or the like determines the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like. The operating voltage of is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Will be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has the specified key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by the clerk of the amusement park or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-3 to 9-5 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and six levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-10 described later, and the setting value 1 in this example is the setting shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-10 described later. The set value 2 in this example corresponds to the value 2, the set value 2 in this example corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-10 described later, and the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set values 9-9 to 9 described later. The set value 4 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in -10 and the like, the set value 4 in this example corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-10 and the like described later, and the set value 5 in this example is shown in the figure described later. It corresponds to the set value 6 shown in 9-9 to 9-10 and the like.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state), and if the value is 1, it is determined that RAM clear is executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, and the game machine frame / door frame open. From the sensor 21TM300, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, to the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-4. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (YES). Change the set value and / on the condition that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070) in step S21TM4030). Or confirmation is possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode) although the change of the set value is not permitted, (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the CPU 103 can confirm the set value (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode) on condition that the setting value has been changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. Since it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value in such a state, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760 described later is not controlled. Move to (Send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , Step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the data check in the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-4 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state in step S21TM4130 (NO in step S21TM4130), and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state in step S21TM4140. (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 does not execute the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the image display device 5 to the setting change mode when the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The notification prompts the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (determine the set value). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 performs a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, so that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)". Although there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that all are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not been performed. " Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a ring lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). Will be done.

During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change (NO). That is, if any of the cases (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value of the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to change the set value (setting change mode), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. The CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed when it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied. It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. It is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) described above.

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power should be turned off once and all the conditions (1) to (3) should be satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In the present embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) The game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even when the two conditions (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5. In the process of FIG. 9-4, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as a regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply Immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed), the power supply is supplied. If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be properly executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display the value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. The setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CPU 103 changes the set value. Set the setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command that specifies that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and moves to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Every time the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time) is 3. If there is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is still 0).

In addition, the display of the current set value (step S21TM4550) and the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM4620). The state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined and controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off should be set. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag, which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted when the setting change mode command is transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes after step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output processing when the normal game processing is started. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , The value of the security signal timer is set so as to continuously output the security signal until at least 1 sec elapses from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether the security signal is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also determined regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. , The control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping the above, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the game machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the security signal is a common value (1000 ms) between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is set in the timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, 1000 ms is once set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710, and then described later. Based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770, 30,000 ms is reset (overwritten) as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465 after the RAM is cleared. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the setting confirmation mode when the security signal is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the setting change mode is set. If it is controlled, it is the timing when 30 sec has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is permitted is interrupted. In the process (for example, information output process), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (RAM clear is performed). When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30,000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. The output of the security signal will be continued until becomes. In addition, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, when the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before the transition to the game control timer interrupt processing. ) To 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control of the setting change mode is finished, and the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 sec elapses after the control of the setting change mode is completed. With such a configuration, while standardizing the output control of the security signal, the output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the mode is controlled in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

As a result, it is possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process is executed and controlled to the setting change mode. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial setting is performed. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion process is executed and the setting change mode is controlled.

A security signal is also output when an error targeting the game stop such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, the RAM clear is not executed, so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output processing and remains set. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power off occurs). Sometimes it is unknown whether or not an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the security signal output period is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have passed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-4, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the set value storage area) on the effect control CPU 120 side is directly imaged. If the display is displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step). It is determined that S21TM4020 is YES), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt is permitted, the game control timer interrupt process (special). (Including design process processing, etc.) That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clear, a backup command will be sent as a command when the power is turned off and restored, and the normal game processing will be started.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the recovery from the power failure was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9 are restored from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. (RAM clearing has not been performed) can be notified.

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. After the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process).

As shown in FIG. 9-5, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (for example, a special symbol process flag, a probability change flag, a time saving flag, hold storage, and power supply to the game machine are generated. Data that can identify the variable display result that was displayed when stopped) is cleared and the initial value is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of RAM 102 is not cleared and the RAM It is not changed before the clearing process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is set in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that it has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if it is controlled to the setting change mode, is the value of the setting value storage area set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or is in the setting change mode? This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The initial value is set.

In this feature unit 026IW, when the process of step S21TM1410 (RAM clear process) is not executed when the power is turned on, for example, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4060 or step S21TM4070, and it can be set to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In some cases, it is determined to be YES in step S21TM4770 without being controlled, and the process at the time of power failure recovery without RAM clearing may be executed. In this case, the variable display result displayed when the power supply is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is initially displayed (in this example, it is displayed first after the power is turned on). It is displayed as information (stop symbol) to be displayed (also called an initial result). The variable display result displayed when the power supply is stopped is the data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (especially the power supply to the game machine) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (backup RAM). It is specified by the variable display result that was displayed when it was stopped).

The data that can identify the variable display result displayed when the power supply to the game machine stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is stopped is, for example, the processing of step S21TM1410 (RAM clear) when the power is turned on. When the process) is executed or when the setting change mode is controlled (in this case, the process (RAM clear process) of step S21TM1410 is executed after the setting change mode ends), the data is deleted from the RAM 102. ..

When displaying the initial display (initial roll) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the setting may be changed depending on the type and mode of the initial display (initial roll) to be displayed. There is a risk that the player will be able to identify whether or not this has been performed and which set value has been changed. For example, a different initial display (initial roll) is displayed when the setting is changed and when it is not changed, or when the setting is changed or changed to a specific setting value. If the initial display (initial roll) is displayed, the player may be able to identify whether or not the setting has been changed and which setting value has been changed.

Further, depending on the type and mode of the initial display (initial result) to be displayed, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand that the control is in an advantageous state. For example, if the initial display (initial roll) corresponding to the jackpot symbol is displayed, the player may misunderstand that the jackpot game state is controlled.

Therefore, the feature unit 026IW is configured to display a common initial display (initial result) regardless of the set value set when the RAM clear process is executed. Further, when the set value is changed, the set value set after the change is configured to display a common initial display (initial result) in any case.

9-6 and 9-7 are explanatory views showing an example of initial display of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B.

FIG. 9-6 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B in a non-display state in which the special symbol before the power is turned on is not displayed.

9-6 (2) and 9-6 (3) show the first special symbol display device 4A by processing step 21TM1440 through the setting change mode of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or without going through the setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which the common initial display (initial appearance) is displayed in the 2nd special symbol display device 4B, regardless of a set value.

Of FIGS. 9-6 (2) and (3), FIG. 9-6 (2) displays a symbol corresponding to the deviation as the initial display (initial roll) regardless of the set value. In FIG. 9-6 (3), an example in which a symbol corresponding to the small hit A is displayed as an initial display (initial roll) is shown.

As described above, in the feature unit 026IW, when the RAM clear processing is executed (that is, regardless of whether or not the setting is changed), the set initial value is common to all cases. It is configured to display the display (initial roll). Also, when the set value is changed (in this example, RAM clear processing is always executed when the setting change mode ends), the initial display (initial) that is common to all the set values set after the change. It is configured to display the roll). Further, it is configured to display a common initial display (initial result) even when the RAM clear process is executed and when the set value is changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being specified whether or not the setting has been changed and the changed setting value, and the state of the game is misidentified (for example, a jackpot game). The possibility of being misidentified as a condition can be reduced.

If either the configuration shown in FIG. 9-6 (2) or the configuration shown in FIG. 9-6 (3) is adopted, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are common. The initial display (initial roll) will be displayed. That is, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured to display the initial display (initial roll) of the alignment. With such a configuration, the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified can be reduced.

Further, in the feature unit 026IW, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can display a plurality of types of symbols corresponding to the deviation, and a plurality of types of symbols corresponding to the small hit. Can be displayed. However, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on, or when the set value is changed, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (2) and 9-6, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special In the symbol display device 4B, a common type of symbol corresponding to a miss or a small hit is displayed as an initial display (initial roll). That is, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured to display the initial display (initial roll) of the alignment. With such a configuration, the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified can be reduced.

Not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 (2) and 9-6, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B have different types of symbols or small hits corresponding to the deviation. A different type of symbol corresponding to may be displayed as the initial display. Further, for example, on one of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the symbol corresponding to the loss is displayed as the initial display, and on the other hand, the symbol corresponding to the small hit is displayed as the initial display. You may try to do it.

In the feature unit 026IW, when the set value is "6" as described later, a determination value corresponding to the deviation is not assigned to the variation display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 9-10). That is, in a normal game, the symbol corresponding to the deviation as shown in FIG. 9-6 (2) is not stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. However, with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol, a determination value corresponding to the deviation is assigned even with the set value "6" (see FIG. 9-9). That is, on the first special symbol display device 4A, a symbol corresponding to the deviation as shown in FIG. 9-6 (2) can be stopped and displayed. In this way, the symbols that can be displayed on at least one of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are displayed as the initial display (initial roll), so that the player may misunderstand or be confused. It is possible to reduce the possibility of doing so.

Not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 026IW, even when the set value is "6", a determination value corresponding to the deviation is assigned to the variation display of the second special symbol (for example, the set value "6". A determination value corresponding to the deviation may be assigned at a smaller rate than in the case of "5").

In this feature unit 026IW, as described later, small hit A, small hit B and small hit C are provided as small hit types, and a determination value corresponding to small hit A is set for the variation display of the second special symbol. Not assigned (see Figure 9-12). That is, in a normal game, the symbol corresponding to the small hit A as shown in FIG. 9-6 (3) is not stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. However, for the variable display of the first special symbol, a determination value corresponding to the small hit A is assigned (see FIG. 9-12). That is, on the first special symbol display device 4A, the symbol corresponding to the small hit A as shown in FIG. 9-6 (d) can be stopped and displayed. In this way, the symbols that can be displayed on at least one of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are displayed as the initial display (initial roll), so that the player may misunderstand or be confused. It is possible to reduce the possibility of doing so.

As will be described later, the feature unit 026IW is configured so that the small hit A is generated only in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9-12). Not limited to this, in any variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the small hit A may be configured to occur.

In the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, when displaying a symbol corresponding to a small hit as an initial display (initial roll) instead of a symbol corresponding to a miss, a plurality of small It is desirable to display the symbol corresponding to the small hit with the lowest advantage among the hit types. In this example, the small hit A can hardly expect the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game, and is less advantageous than the small hit B and the small hit C. Therefore, the symbol corresponding to the small hit A is displayed as the initial display. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility of being mistaken for being controlled in an advantageous state.

Further, instead of the configuration of the feature unit 026IW, for example, a case where step 21TM1440 is processed without going through the setting change mode, and a case where step 21TM1440 is processed through the setting change mode of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620. Then, the mode of the initial display (initial result) may be different.

For example, when step 21TM1440 is processed and the initial display (initial result) is displayed without going through the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (1), the first special symbol display device 4A And the second special symbol display device 4B, the symbol corresponding to the outlier type 1 out of a plurality of types of outliers is displayed as the initial display (initial roll), and the step 21TM1440 is processed to perform the initial display through the setting change mode. When the display (initial roll) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (2), the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B have a plurality of types of deviations. The symbol corresponding to the out-of-order type 2 may be displayed as the initial display (initial roll). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the setting has been changed, but it is possible to reduce the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified.

Further, an example is shown in which the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and this is an example. For example, the display device 026IW001 shown in FIG. 9-8 is provided, and among the plurality of LEDs included in the display device 026IW001, the first special symbol is used in different lighting modes of LEDs in a predetermined area (lighting combination of predetermined LEDs). And the second special symbol may be displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (1), among the 40 LEDs included in the display device 026IW001, the special figure 2 which is the second special symbol depending on the lighting mode of the eight LEDs on the upper right. The display result of the special figure 1 which is the first special symbol may be represented by the lighting mode of the eight LEDs next to the display result of. Further, depending on the lighting mode of the other LEDs, for example, the display result and the number of holdings of the normal symbol, the number of holdings of the special symbol, the jackpot type, and whether or not the time reduction control is in progress may be indicated. In this case, the initial display (initial roll) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be set to correspond to the deviation by the LED lighting combination shown in FIG. 9-8 (2), or FIG. 9-8. Depending on the lighting combination of the LEDs shown in (3), the mode corresponding to the small hit A may be set.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt processing described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process processing is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization process is performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM is cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize what was done). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9, the game state and the like are initialized (data when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the setting change mode ends is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Without), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode), the process of this step S21TM1465 is not executed, so that the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is up to.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-mentioned step S21TM4710, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). After that, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 sets the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result by executing the process according to, for example, the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game shifts to the normal game processing in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit is one round (taking the random number for determining the normal symbol hit). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power failure recovery, but not limited to this form, the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), the condition is that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (depending on the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). You may move to the process when the power is cut off and restored.

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (game machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be started.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko game machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control it, and it is also possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As described above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-3 to 9-5, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). It is enabled to be controlled in S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (the game control timer interrupt process is executed), and when the power is turned on, the power is supplied. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when an interrupt occurred.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-3 to 9-5, the CPU 103 has a condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). When step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a set value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and a display monitor is displayed in the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character "E" is performed on 21TM029 (step S21TM4210).

For example, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (power is supplied while being controlled to the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that a disconnection has occurred) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the set value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). (Confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the game machine frame 3 is set. It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES) is determined, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode ") will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), It is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "In the setting change mode" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area By switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing to the planned set value, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii). If any of the above conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 loop processing) after the setting value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled by the setting change mode. .. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“return the power after the power is turned off”) If the setting change mode is also performed, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode after the power is restored is the state of the game machine even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. knows that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is displayed on the main board 11 side. It will automatically shift to the setting change mode without being disturbed, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), and an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 side is displayed. It will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i) is satisfied. )-(Iii) may not be satisfied, and different commands may be sent as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for transition is satisfied). On the production control CPU 120 that receives this command, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled to the setting change mode" are displayed as images. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to send the setting value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 according to the fact (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) 21TM052 is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), and the game control microcomputer 100 sends a setting changeover switch operation command to the effect control CPU 120.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Despite this, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify that fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended and the normal game processing has started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period during which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
9-9 and 9-10 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIGS. 9-9 show the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 9-10 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9. In the example shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "2470/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (A) and 9-9 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "6298/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. As shown in FIGS. 9-9 (A) and 9-9 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. Is different in the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

Next, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-10. In the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" is the jackpot probability "2550/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" is the jackpot probability "2550/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) and 9-10 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "62986/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 9-10), the small hit is compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9-9). The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). As shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) and 9-10 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. Is different in the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

In the feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, the probabilistic state (high probability state) is more likely to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state than the non-probability state (low probability state). For example, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state), and the frequency of jackpots is higher. Further, the probability variation state (high probability state) has a larger difference in jackpot probability for each setting than the non-probability variation state (low probability state) (that is, the difference in jackpot probability between the set values is large). In this example, the jackpot probability is exceptional only between the set values "4" to "5" and "5" to "6" of the non-probability change state (low probability state) in the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-10. However, in principle, the probability change state (high probability state) has a larger difference in jackpot probability for each setting than the non-probability change state (low probability state). Therefore, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the difference in the jackpot probability for each setting is easier for the player to recognize than in the non-probability state (low probability state). That is, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the set value is estimated based on the frequency of big hits, the probability of big hits, the number of fluctuations between big hits, etc., as compared with the non-probability state (low probability state). It's easy to do. Specifically, since the frequency of big hits increases, the set value can be estimated in a shorter period of time. In addition, the difference in jackpot probability between the set values is large, and the difference for each setting appears more remarkably, so that the set value can be easily guessed. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, the probability variation state (high probability state) is different from the non-probability variation state (low probability state) in the jackpot probability between the set values. However, it is not limited to such a configuration, and the difference in jackpot probability between some of the previously set values becomes large (specifically, the first set value (specifically, the first set value (specifically,) For example, the difference between the jackpot probability between the "1") and the second set value (for example, "2") becomes large, or the first set value group (for example, "1" to "3") and the second set value group (for example, "2"). For example, the difference between the jackpot probabilities of "4" to "6") may be large). In addition, the setting values "4" to "5" and "5" to "6" in the non-probability change state (low probability state) in the second special symbol are also set between the set values "1" and "2". The difference in jackpot probability similar to that between the values "2" and "3" may be used.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-10, for the second special symbol, when the set value is "6", the probability of loss is 0 (that is, the determination value corresponding to the loss is not included. ).

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the judgment value corresponding to the deviation is included in the judgment values corresponding to all the set values "1" to "6" (FIGS. 9-9 and 9-). As shown in FIG. 10, there is no set value in which the probability of loss is 0), and the allocation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, the set values "1" to "6". The probability of loss differs depending on which of the above).

Further, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (FIG. 9-9), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. Good.

In addition, in FIGS. 9-9 (A) and (B) and 9-10 (A) and (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the off-probability is different, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability is higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state), so the small hit probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the probability of loss. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched respectively. As a result, in a game machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6 or a game machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a type of game machine having a setting change function in 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
9-11 (A) and 9-11 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" based on the random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to for determining either "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "10R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), in this feature unit 026IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", There is a 9% chance that it will be a "10R probability variation jackpot", a 56% chance that it will be a "6R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% chance that it will be a "6R normal jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), in this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be a "10R probability variation jackpot" with a 35% probability, a "6R probability variation jackpot" with a 30% probability, a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 30% probability, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 5% probability. 2R normal jackpot "is determined.

The "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this feature unit 026IW, when "10R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot" are obtained, a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the jackpot game. The large winning openings are controlled to be open until a fixed number of game balls (10 in this example) are won, and a maximum of 10 large winning openings can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings to the large winning openings that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

Further, in this feature unit 026IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The method of transitioning the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIGS. 9-35).

(Small hit type judgment table)
9-12 (A) and 9-12 (B) are explanatory views showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to "small hit A" or "small hit B" based on the random number for determining the hit type. , Or a table referenced to determine either "small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (A), in this feature unit 026IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", It is determined as "small hit A" with a 100% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), in this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be "small hit B" with a probability of 70%, and is determined to be "small hit C" with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-18), and the small hit game. You can hardly expect a game ball to win a special prize inside. In the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 9-19), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 9-20), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected most.

(Variation pattern table)
9-13 to 9-15 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the feature unit 026IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 9-13 to 9-15 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-13 to 9-15, nine types of first variable patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variable pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol are used. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-13 (A). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), FIG. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 9-14 (C). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-14 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this feature unit 026IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening. I will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is executed. By reducing the number of small hits, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball even in a non-KT state. In this feature unit 026IW, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-14 (D) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-14 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (D), when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. The variation pattern for preparation) is determined. In this feature unit 026IW, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win in the special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature unit 026IW, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG. 9-14 (Fig. 9-14). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in E) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-14 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to be either. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (E), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # It may be determined by 07 or the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern # 11 of the shortened fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 07 and # 10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 08 and # 11 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 9-14 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-14 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Will be decided.

In the feature unit 026IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “during chance time”. As shown in FIG. 9-14 (F), when it is determined that the 50th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 14 or the second fluctuation pattern # 15 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. A second variation pattern # 16 is determined with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed.

In addition, in this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-13, when a big hit is made in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is displayed. It is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this feature unit 026IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present feature unit 026IW, even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed. Select the variation pattern table according to the number of times. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is to be executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 9-15 (G) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-15 (G), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second fluctuation patterns # 17 to # 21 Will be decided.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (G), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed, the high shown in FIG. 9-15 (H). Probability / The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 9-15 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 22 to # 28 Is decided.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (H), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state are out of order, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (H). The second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are out of range, the second fluctuation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is shortened to 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 25, and the fluctuation time is further shortened to 1 second. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 26 of the fluctuation. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 9-15 (I) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-15 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. ..

As shown in FIG. 9-15 (I), when the deviation is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 32 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the fluctuation time is usually 5 seconds. The second fluctuation pattern # 33 of the fluctuation may be determined. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, it depends on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number for determining the variation pattern, and which variation pattern is used is determined. FIG. 9-16 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 9-15 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 9-16, in this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variation display which is a small hit is executed, the variation display is executed. , Regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the second variation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second variation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is selected.

In addition, in FIG. 9-16, as an example, a variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state is shown, but FIGS. 9-13 to 9-15 show. The other variation pattern tables shown are also configured in the same manner, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-14 to 9-16, the shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is highly probable in the case of the second KT state. It shows the case where it is configured to be executed in, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 9-17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, using FIG. 9-17 (1), a special variable winning ball when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, and a 2R probability variation jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "probability variation jackpot"). The opening pattern of the device 7 will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-17 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (1), when the winning of the second game ball to the jackpot is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven and V. The area opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the game ball can enter the V area 052IW104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the large winning openings in the first round, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (1), special When the variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

When the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 within a predetermined detection valid period, the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 9-17 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 It is a period from when the closed state is controlled again until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

Next, using FIG. 9-17 (2), opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal jackpot”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-17 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (2), when the winning of the first game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven and V. The region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open for an extremely short period (0.02 seconds in this example). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the large winning openings in the first round, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (2), special The variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 9-17 (2), in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is after an extremely short opening period (0.02 seconds in this example) of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101. It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 9-17 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the V region 052IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and is easily controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 052IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in this example, in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 at a higher rate during the jackpot game than in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 9-18 to 9-20 are explanatory views for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 9-18 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Further, FIG. 9-19 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Further, FIG. 9-20 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. 9-18 (1) to 9-20 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIGS. 9-18 (2) show the opening patterns. 9-20 (2) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-18 (1) to 9-20 (1). As shown in FIGS. 9-18 (1) to 9-20 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 (1) to 9-20 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the hit symbol and the missed symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 (1) to 9-20 (1), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 9-18 (1). In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. As shown in -20 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of small hit A, it becomes possible to win a prize. , Since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected). However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-18 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds, or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 (1) to 9-20 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed. is there. Therefore, in the feature unit 026IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the feature unit 026IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 0.1 seconds, has passed, and the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-18 (2) to 9-20 (2). As shown in FIGS. 9-18 (2) to 9-20 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 (2) to 9-20 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the hit symbol and the missed symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 (2) to 9-20 (2), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 9-18 (2). In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. As shown in -20 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the feature unit 026IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 (2) to 9-20 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. Compared with the first KT state, the game ball is more likely to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball is more likely to win the special winning opening. However, in the case of the small hit A, since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for 0.2 seconds, which is extremely short, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the special winning opening even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit RUSH". Character display such as "is displayed.

Further, in this example, a case where the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is different depending on which of the small hit types A to C is used is shown. I can't be limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be different depending on which of the small hits A to C is the small hit type. In this case, for example, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of small hit B or small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) can be opened by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 four times for 0.4 seconds. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a prize, and various modes can be considered. Further, in this example, the case where there are three types of small hits A to C is shown, but the case is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more types of small hits are provided. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 026IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In this feature unit 026IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103). This is done by executing (see step S26). Further, in the normal symbol process processing in step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a big hit game state, it is determined whether or not to make a normal hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In this feature unit 026IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in the feature unit 026IW, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the high base state is controlled, so that FIGS. 9-18 (1) to FIGS. As shown in 9-20 (1), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. Further, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened as shown in FIGS. 9-18 (2) to 9-20 (2) by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag. It is controlled so that the time is shortened.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIGS. 9-18 (1) to 9- The variable winning ball device 6B as shown in 20 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIGS. 9-18 (2) to 9-20. The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, out of the 50 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

In addition, as described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 to 9-20, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in this feature unit 026IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Is set to start, so that it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 9-21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 9-21, the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 10R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 026IW, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a display result specification command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the display result specification command is for the first special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command is a display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result is displayed. The designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 10R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has finished lighting. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning winning designation command, but this feature unit 026IW Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (design) that indicates whether or not a big hit is made, whether or not a small hit is made, and the judgment result of the big hit type or the small hit type among the judgment results at the time of winning. Specified command). Further, the command C6XX (H) is an effect control command (variation) indicating a determination result (variation pattern determination result) of which determination value range the value of the random number for variation pattern determination is in the determination result at the time of winning. Category command).

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating the currently set setting value. A set value is set in "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 9-21, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIG. 9-21 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(1st start winning judgment process)
FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing the first start winning determination process (step S101A) in the first special symbol process process.

In the first start winning determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved storage). It is confirmed (whether or not the value of the first reserved storage counter for counting the number is 4) (step 072IWS041). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start winning determination process is terminated as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step 072IWS042) and the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step 072IWS043). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 104 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (step 072IWS044). In the process of step 072IWS044, a random number for hit determination, a random number for hit type determination, a random number for determination of fluctuation pattern, etc., which are software random numbers, are extracted and stored in a storage area provided in the RAM 102 as hold information. To. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is not extracted in the first start winning judgment process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. Good. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract a value from a random number counter for generating a random number for determining a variation pattern in the first variation pattern setting process described later.

Next, the CPU 103 executes the winning determination process (step 072IWS045), and controls to transmit the symbol designation command and the variable category command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning determination process (step 072IWS046). , 072IWS047). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, and the big hit type or the small hit type are determined. Apart from that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started, the winning judgment process is executed in advance. Whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit, the type of the big hit, the type of the small hit, the fluctuation category, the fluctuation pattern, etc. are determined. By doing so, the display result can be predicted before the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, and the pre-reading advance notice effect can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result at the time of winning. In the prize-winning determination process, both the big hit and the small hit may be determined at the time of the start winning, or the judgment at the time of the start winning may be performed only for the big hit.

In the winning effect processing, for example, the CPU 103 compares the random number for hit determination with the large hit determination value and the small hit determination value in the normal time, and confirms whether or not they match. If they do not match, if the probability change flag is set, the CPU 103 compares the random number for hit determination with the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value at the time of probability change, and confirms whether or not they match. .. Further, for example, when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match, the CPU 103 determines which big hit type matches based on the hit type determination, and the random number for hit determination and the small hit type are determined. If the hit determination value matches, it is determined which small hit type matches based on the hit type determination. It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays may be executed between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step 072IWS045 and the time when the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state changes before the fluctuation display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, if a probability change jackpot occurs before the start of the fluctuation, the normal state changes to the probability change state. There are cases. Therefore, the gaming state at the start winning and the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a discrepancy, the one with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the judgment at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. May be good.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 072IWS048).

In this embodiment, when the processing of steps 072IWS046 to 072IWS048 is executed, a start winning to the first starting winning opening is generated and the winning determination process is executed, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the variable category command are executed. A set of three commands of the first effective start prize designation command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed. If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step 052IWS53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the 1st reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 052IWS54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started. However, the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. The probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability / first KT, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, the command is high probability / first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT state is determined and the high accuracy / second KT background specification command is executed. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 052IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A without performing the processing after step 052IWS58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 052IWS59A, at the time of starting winning. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot based on the hit type determination random number (step 052IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and step 052IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS65A). Step 052IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 052IWS68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit A (see FIG. 9-12 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 052IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 052IWS75A. Move to. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 052IWS70A). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 052IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052IWS72A), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 052IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A.

In this feature unit 026IW, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of times the variation display is executed in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled and 50 times of fluctuation display is executed. In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 052IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 052IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time reduction flag is also reset in steps 052IWS73A and S73B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while keeping the state.

In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS74A or the process of step 052IWS74B described later, the high base state is caused by the start of fluctuation of either the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol. When the final fluctuation of (in this example, the 50th fluctuation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the fluctuation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, whether the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variation display) ends. , Or the other special symbol variation display (in this example, the 51st variation display) is reset, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variation shortening state is completed. Is desirable.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 052IWS75A is confirmed.

In step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step 052IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (Fig. 9-13). (Refer to FIG. 9-15), a small hit is likely to occur, so that the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-13 (A) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 052IWS1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 9-13 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 052IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9-13 should be used (step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 052IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 052IWS1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to the effect control CPU 120. Control for transmission is performed (step 052IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS1122A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A), controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1123A). Step 052IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is obtained is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 052IWS1127A). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS1128A). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 052IWS1125A) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126A), either the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed. When the variation display of the first special symbol (that is, 6R is a normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127A, N in step 052IWS1128A), the CPU 103 causes the effect control CPU 120 to perform the first compulsory symbol. Control is performed to send a confirmation designation command (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is varied based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129A. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot). If the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 052IWS1120A, the processing of steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the first variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the first special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed and the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-26 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, the person who performs the right-handed operation when the game state is controlled to the KT state. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but the 50th variation display is displayed by executing the processes of steps 052IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B. When starting, the low probability / first KT state is terminated to shift to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processes of steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B are executed to end the 50th variation display. The right-handed display 26 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). In this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is forced as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag indicating that the big hit is started (step 052IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 052IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. However, as already explained, when a small hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only the small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed display 26 is not lit and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. You may be.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right-handed notification or launch promotion notification is not executed, and when the game ball wins the first start winning opening in that state, the right-handed notification or launch promotion notification is executed. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first holding memory is set). It may be configured as.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, according to the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , The player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. Further, when the passing gate 41 detects a game ball a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. It may be configured to give a left-handed notification when a small number (for example, one) or more of game balls are detected.

In this feature unit 026IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 9-27 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the character control process flag is a value indicating the character control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In addition to storing in the second random number buffer area of (step 052IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 052IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started. However, the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 052IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 052IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B without performing the processing after step 052IWS58B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the material is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress in step 052IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 052IWS59B, eventually at the start winning prize. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63B). ), The process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS65B). Step 052IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 052IWS68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit B or small hit C (see FIG. 9-12 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 052IWS69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 052IWS70B). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 052IWS71B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052IWS72B), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 052IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 052IWS75B is confirmed.

In step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 9-24. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-24, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 052IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Unless the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-14 (C) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 fluctuates according to whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any of the variation pattern tables for the second special symbol for KT shown in FIGS. 9-14 (D) to 9-15 (I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-14 (D). Select, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-14 (E) for the 2nd to 49th variations, and select the second variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-14 (F) for the 50th variation. Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-15 (G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-15 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (in the high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-15 (I) is selected.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 9-28 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the decision result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command, display result 6 designation command, display result 7 designation command) Is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS1122B), and when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B), controls to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1123B). Step 052IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 052IWS1127B). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS1128B). .. Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 052IWS1125B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126B), the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and When the variation display of the second special symbol that is neither a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127B, N in step 052IWS1128B), the CPU 103 is the effect control CPU 120. Is controlled to send the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to (step 052IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129B. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, Or, if the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes the 2R probability variation jackpot) is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol. Based on the fact that the variation display of the symbol becomes a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 052IWS1120B, the processing of steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 052IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the reduced working hours state), the remaining second hold memory can be digested, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

Further, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol is provided on the right side of the game area. In a gaming machine configured to provide a starting winning opening that is not a variable winning ball device) and to shift to the normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH). , As described above, the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, as the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed accordingly. By increasing the frequency of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state, and further suppress the occurrence of the jackpot at the unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be done.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-29 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is forced as the stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 052IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2024B), and is right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting start designation command (step 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. It is advantageous, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed display 26 should already be lit when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 052IWS2023B, if a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed display 26 is started to light in duplicate. The process of sending a right-handed lighting start specification command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027B).

(Characteristic control normal processing)
FIG. 9-30 is a flowchart showing a bonus control normal process (step S120) in the bonus control process process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 052IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big winning opening (step 052IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 052IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 052IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 9-31 is a flowchart showing a gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 052IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special time reduction flag if set, and clears the value of the high base count counter to 0 ( Step 052IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 052IWS2504).

In this feature unit 026IW, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the gate passage waiting process, but the game is played at the passing gate 41. It is configured to shift to the jackpot game on condition that the ball has passed and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 9-32 is a flowchart showing a jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the process of opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 052IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 has a winning number for counting the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening. The value of the counter is added by 1 (step 052IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening (step 052IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 052IWS2406) or when the open time timer times out (Y in step 052IWS2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the big winning door. It is stopped and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed (step 052IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a display command after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-processing after opening the jackpot (step 052IWS2412).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 9-33 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 052IWS2202. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is displayed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) on the jackpot end display timer. A value is set (step 052IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 052IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the probability change flag, and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS2207). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2208). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. In the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set. Therefore, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / low base state (high) It will be controlled by probability / second KT state).

If it is neither a 10R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot completed this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS2209). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2210), and further sets the special time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2211). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, only the high base flag is set, and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base count counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step 052IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base count counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is completed, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. It is determined as Y in step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 052IWS70A and step 052IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2212), and sets the special time reduction flag. To the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 052IWS2214). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2215).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 9-34 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 052IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 052IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 052IWS2304). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed indicator 26 is lit (step 052IWS2305). If the right-handed display 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2306), and also transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 starts lighting at the start of the small hit game (steps 052IWS2023B to S2025B). (See), the processing of steps 052IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 026IW will be described. FIG. 9-35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the feature unit 026IW. First, in this feature unit 026IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-35, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game is completed. It shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / high base state (high probability / high base state) after the jackpot game ends. The first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature unit 026IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. To launch the game ball (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot occurs mainly.

As shown in FIG. 9-35, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, in this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot is 30% in total (see FIG. 9-11), so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 30%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in FIG. 9-35, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot is 30% (see FIGS. 9-11 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 30%. If a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, and then 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, FIG. 9-35 shows. As shown, it shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 052IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in FIG. 9-35, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In this feature unit 026IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is 40 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is% (see FIGS. 9-11 (D) and 9-11 (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 40%. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 9-35, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). become. Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-35, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-35, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-35, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

(Normal symbol process processing)
Next, a normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 9-36 is a flowchart showing an example of ordinary symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process processing, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and the gate switch 21 is turned on (step 052IWS5111), Control is performed to transmit the gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passing process (step 052IWS5113).

In this feature unit 026IW, when the process of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113 is executed and the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In this feature unit 026IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area. Is it in a state of waiting for the passage of the gate after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and before the jackpot game is started? Regardless of whether or not, the gate passage specification command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps 052IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In this feature unit 026IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passing process of step 052IWS5113 is executed regardless of whether or not the gate is waiting to pass. Normally, the variable display of the symbol is executed, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed only when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when it is not in the gate passage waiting state, and the normal symbol is executed even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the gate passing state. It may be configured not to execute the variable display of.

Further, in this feature unit 026IW, the passing gate 41 is normally used as a gate for both the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt processing. Since it is executed before the symbol process process (see step S26), the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the normal starting area is performed after the detection process of the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the operating region is performed. The detection process is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch pass processing (step 052IWS5113): In the CPU 103, the count value (gate pass memory number) of the gate pass memory counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the pass gate 41) is the maximum value (in this example, " 4 ”) is confirmed. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1. The LED of the normal figure hold indicator 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100): When the CPU 103 is in a state where it can start the fluctuation of the normal symbol (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step 052IWS5100, specifically, the normal symbol In the case where the display 20 does not display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20 is not being opened or closed), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed. If the number of stored gates is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step 052IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a missed symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step 052IWS5103).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol process timer to the normal electric accessory operation time and timers. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal design normal processing)
FIG. 9-37 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step 052IWS5121), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing memory number = 1 (step 052IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol, performs a lottery process based on a random number (random number value for determining whether to hit a normal symbol), and determines whether or not to hit a normal symbol. (Step 052IWS5127). In this feature unit 026IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 is uniformly 99/100 regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state, the KT state, or the high base state. It is decided that it will be a normal symbol with a probability.

In step 052IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is within the hit range (when it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as a display result (step 052IWS5128), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130. Further, in step 052IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range (when it is out of the range), the CPU 103 sets the out-of-order symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130.

In step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y, S5131 in step 052IWS5130). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, S5132 in step 052IWS5130).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal symbol stop processing)
FIG. 9-38 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (in step 052IWS5127). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step 052IWS3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 052IWS5127, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100) (step 052IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step 052IWS3708).

In step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3706). Further, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). ..

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103) (step 052IWS3707).

(Normal electric accessory opening pretreatment)
FIG. 9-39 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). , That is, when it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3805). When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3804).

In this way, in this feature unit 026IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the start winning in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the feature unit 026IW. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of times the 6B is opened may be set to 1 time, whereas the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B may be opened may be set to 2 times in the first KT state). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning of the second starting winning opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above and the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state (step 052IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104) (step 052IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 9-40 to 9-43 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 052IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 052IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 052IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 052IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 052IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 052IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620). ).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation command, 2nd symbol confirmation command, 1st forced symbol confirmation command, 2nd forced symbol confirmation command) (step 052IWS621) ), The effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 052IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start displaying the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 052IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 052IWS624 and S627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display displayed during the big hit game, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed. For example, when the right-handed display is started in step 052IWS624, the right-handed display of the white display color is normally started, but when the execution of the set value suggestion effect is decided, the set value "1" is set. If is, the right-handed display of the blue display color is started at a relatively high rate, and if the setting value is "2", the right-handed display of the green display color is started at a relatively high rate. , When the setting value is "3", the right-handed display of the yellow display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "4", the right of the orange display color is relatively high. When the setting value is "5", the right-handed display of the red display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "6", the right-handed display is started at a relatively high rate. Right-handed display of the rainbow-colored display color may be started.

Further, for example, the right-handed display is configured to be continuously executed even during the KT state after the jackpot game ends, and the right-handed display display mode (for example, display color) is changed and set at the timing of the jackpot game end. It may be configured to perform a value suggestion effect.

Further, for example, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is finished in the low probability / first KT state and the state shifts to the normal state (low probability / low base state), the left-handed display is configured to start, and the left-handed display is started. The display mode (for example, the display color) of the display may be changed to execute the set value suggestion effect. When the control of the game state is switched in some form in this way, the set value suggestion effect may be configured to be executable.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a display command in which the large winning opening is open (step 052IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 is the number of winnings for counting the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening during the round of the big hit game. The value of the counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS634). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the big winning opening opening flag that specifies that the big winning opening is being opened (the round period during the big hit game) (step 052IWS635).

In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the large winning opening opening display command (timing to start the round), which is extremely rare. Even if an over-winning is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received effect control command is a display command after opening the large winning opening (step 052IWS636), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the large winning opening that specifies that it is an interval period after opening the large winning opening. (Step 052IWS637).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052IWS638), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 052IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol specification commands (step 072IWS001), the effect control CPU 101 sends the received symbol specification command to the first free read-ahead determination result command storage area formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area of (step 072IWS002).

If the received effect control command is one of the variable category commands (step 072IWS003), the effect control CPU 101 transmits the received variable category command to each storage area of the look-ahead determination result command storage area formed in the RAM. Of these, it is stored in the storage area where the latest symbol specification command is stored (step 072IWS004).

If the received effect control command is the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command (step 072IWS005), the effect control CPU 101 receives the first valid start prize designation command or the second valid start prize designation command. The designated command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command is stored in each storage area of the look-ahead determination result command storage area formed in the RAM (step 072IWS006).

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / non-KT background designation command (step 052IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, Control to display the image (blue background image) (step 052IWS643). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step 052IWS644). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is a prize for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state. If the ball count counter is set, the value of the prize ball counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645a). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the prize ball number display if the prize ball number display is displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS645b). It should be noted that the prize ball number display is realized by the total number of acquired number display image 158F001, the history icon image 158F002, etc., which will be described later. It is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on this.

In this example, a game ball wins in the big winning opening during a big hit game (except during a big hit game based on a 2R probability variable big hit or a 2R normal big hit), or a game is played in a special winning opening during a high probability / second KT state. When a ball wins a prize, the value of the prize ball counter is cumulatively updated (see steps 052IWS660 and S667), but the processing of step 052IWS645 is executed so that the game state has a low probability / The value of the prize ball counter is cleared to 0 when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed after the high base state (low probability / first KT state) is reached and the low probability / low base state is reached.

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 052IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / first KT state (for example, Control to display with the green background image) (step 052IWS647). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in the high probability state and the second KT state indicating that the state is in the second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 052IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 052IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / first KT state (for example,). Control to display in the yellow background image) (step 052IWS651). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 052IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 052IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / second KT state (for example,). Control to display the image (red background image) (step 052IWS655). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 052IWS657).

If the received effect control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step 077IWS658), the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 077IWS659). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the large winning opening (step 077IWS660). Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number display process for displaying the acquired prize balls (077IWS662).

By executing the processes of steps 077IWS658 to S660, in this example, the value of the prize ball counter is updated based on the fact that the prize is won in the big prize opening during the big hit game. Then, the prize ball number display is updated by executing the prize ball number display process of step 077IWS662.

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 077IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 052IWS666). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a special winning opening winning flag indicating that a game ball has been won in the special winning opening (step 077IWS667). Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number display process for displaying the acquired prize balls (077IWS662).

Step 052 By executing the process of IWS665-S667, in this example, the value of the prize ball counter is updated based on the occurrence of a prize in the special winning opening. Then, the prize ball number display is updated by executing the prize ball number display process of step 077IWS662.

In this embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls is the same 15 when the game ball is won in the large winning opening and when the game ball is won in the special winning opening is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the number of prize balls is set to 15 when a game ball wins in the large prize opening, while the number of prize balls is set to 10 when a game ball wins in the special winning opening. May be good.

If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demo display specification command (step 077IWS669), the effect control CPU 120 sets a demo specification command reception flag indicating that the customer wait demo display specification command has been received (step 077IWS670). ..

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 052IWS671). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS611.

(Display of the number of prize balls)
Next, an effect drawing for displaying the number of prize balls in the feature unit 026IW will be described. In the feature unit 026IW, the display mode of the display regarding the prize ball as the game value given according to various game states is different. How to display in each game state will be described below. FIG. 9-44 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode during the jackpot state and the KT state.

As shown in FIG. 9-44 (A), during the 10R probability variation big hit game, the big hit effect is executed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, the numerical value of the total number of acquisition display image 158F001 on the upper right of the screen is added and updated based on the game ball that won the big prize opening during the big hit game. The total acquired number display image 158F001 is displayed until it is controlled to the normal state. During the big hit game, every time a game ball wins a prize in the big winning opening, the numerical value of the total number of acquisition display image 158F001 is updated by adding 15pt. After the 10R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 9-44 (A), the state is controlled to the second KT state as shown in FIG. 9-44 (B).

As shown in FIG. 9-44 (B), during the second KT state, a history icon image 158F002 showing the history of the previously controlled 10R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the history icon image 158F002, a numerical value (shown in FIG. 9-44 (B)) indicating the number of prize balls given in the 10R probability variation big hit game state before being controlled to the second KT state is shown below the character of "big hit". In the example, "1500"; hereinafter also referred to as the number of acquisitions) and the numerical value indicating the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game state ("1G" in the example shown in FIG. 9-44 (B). ) Is displayed together. Further, in the total acquired number display image 158F001, a numerical value indicating that 1500 images have been acquired, which is the same as the history icon image 158F002, is displayed. Further, the history icon image 158F002 and the total acquired number display image 158F001 are displayed with priority over the effect image by the effect executed during the variable display (excluding specific effects such as the super reach effect described later) (that is,). The effect image is not displayed superimposed on the history icon image 158F002 or the total acquired number display image 158F001). In the example shown in FIGS. 9-44, the winning number display indicating the number of prize balls and the fluctuation number display indicating the number of fluctuations are expressed in alphanumeric characters, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, for example, a meter. It may be expressed by display, color, pattern, character, or the like.

When a small hit occurs during the second KT state, it is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-44 (C). When a small hit occurs as shown in FIG. 9-44 (C), a small hit image 158F003 of "small hit occurs!" Is displayed as a prize ball increase image on the screen of the image display device 5, and "small hit image 158F003" is displayed. The prize ball image 158F004 of "+15" is displayed. Further, the acquired number display of the history icon image 158F002 is updated and displayed by immediately reflecting the number of prize balls due to the small hits given during the second KT state (example shown in FIG. 9-44 (C)). Then "1845"). In addition, the total number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the second KT state is displayed on the total number of acquired number display image 158F001. The fluctuation number display of the history icon image 158F002 is updated and displayed every time the fluctuation display is performed after the 10R probability variation jackpot game (“24G” in the example shown in FIG. 9-44 (C)). For example, in the variable display start setting process, a process of updating the variation number display of the history icon image 158F002 is executed.

Here, the display mode of the history icon image 158F002 changes stepwise depending on the total number of prize balls acquired during the second KT state. For example, when the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state is 0 to 200, the display mode is white, and when the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state is 201-400, the display mode is blue, and the second KT. The display mode when the total number of acquisitions in the state is 401 to 600 is red, and the display mode when the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state is 601 or more is rainbow-colored. In this way, the display mode changes every time the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state increases by 200. FIG. 9-44 (C) shows a state in which the history icon image 158F002 is displayed in blue. The display mode of the history icon image 158F002 may be changed stepwise depending on the total number of acquisitions including during the big hit game.

In addition, the display mode of the history icon image 158F002 changes in a stepwise manner according to the number of fluctuations. For example, in the display mode when the number of fluctuations in the second KT state is 0 to 49, alphanumeric characters indicating the number of fluctuations are displayed without a mark, and when the number of fluctuations in the second KT state is 59 to 99, the display mode is displayed. In the mode, alphanumeric characters indicating the number of fluctuations are displayed surrounded by a quadrangle, and in the display mode when the number of fluctuations in the second KT state is 100 or more, alphanumeric characters indicating the number of fluctuations are displayed surrounded by a circle. Will be done. In this way, the display mode changes every time the number of fluctuations in the second KT state increases by 50. With such a configuration, the number of fluctuations display is displayed according to the number of fluctuations between jackpots. Therefore, the player can intuitively recognize the number of fluctuations until the big hit occurs. In addition to such a configuration, when a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations between jackpots is satisfied (for example, when a jackpot occurs several times with a number of fluctuations less than or greater than a predetermined number of times, or when a plurality of jackpots occur. When the numbers are continuous (so-called consecutive villas), the fact may be further notified.

Next, when the 6R probability variation jackpot is won during the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-44 (D), an effect indicating the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. During the 6R probability variation jackpot, the numerical value of the total number of acquisition display image 158F001 on the upper right of the screen is added and updated based on the game ball that won the jackpot during the jackpot game. Even during the 6R probability variation jackpot, the history icon image 158F002 may be displayed separately for the 10R probability variation jackpot and the 6R probability variation jackpot, and the numerical value of the history icon image 158F002 for the 6R probability variation jackpot may be added and updated.

Next, a case where the first KT state is controlled after the end of the 6R probability variation jackpot will be described. When the 6R probability variation jackpot game is completed, two history icon images 158F002 are displayed as shown in FIG. 9-44 (E). Further, the total number of acquired number display image 158F001 displays the total number of the two history icon images 158F002. In the history icon image 158F002, one section from the start of the big hit to the start of the next big hit is displayed as one section. In the history icon image 158F002 on the left side corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot, the total number of prize balls during the 10R probability variation jackpot and the total number of prize balls acquired by the small hit game during the second KT state are below the characters of "big hit". The number of acquisitions is displayed (“1845” in the example shown in FIG. 9-44 (E)), and the number of fluctuations executed until the next 6R probability variation jackpot is started is displayed as the number of fluctuations (FIG. 9-44). In the example shown in (E), it is displayed as "25G"). Further, in the history icon image 158F002 on the right side corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot, the number of prize balls during the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed below the characters "hit" and "1st KT" (Fig. 9-44 (E)). In the example shown, it is displayed as "900"). Since the history icon image 158F002 on the right side corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggers the transition to the first KT state, the fluctuation count display indicating the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game is not displayed. That is, in the present feature unit 026IW, in the second KT state where the longer the duration is, the more preferable the player is, the number of fluctuations until the next big hit starts is displayed, but the shorter the duration is, the more preferable the player is. In the 1KT state, the fluctuation number display until the next big hit starts is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the display of the number of fluctuations in the first KT state, which is useless information that may make the player uncomfortable by displaying the information.

Although not shown in FIGS. 9-44, in addition to the case of shifting to the first KT state (high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state)) after the 6R probability variation jackpot, the 2R normal jackpot Even when the state shifts to the first KT state (low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state)) later, the change number display indicating the number of changes after the big hit game is not displayed on the history icon image.

Further, in the example of FIGS. 9-44, in the history icon image 158F002 corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot that triggers the transition to the second KT state, the character "big hit" is displayed, which triggers the transition to the first KT state. In the history icon image 158F002 corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot, the characters "hit" and "first KT" are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and the jackpot type may be displayed as characters. For example, in the history icon image 158F002 corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot (shift to the 2nd KT state after the jackpot game), the characters "10R probability variation" and "2nd KT" are displayed, and the 6R probability variation jackpot (shift to the 1st KT state after the jackpot game). ) Corresponding to the history icon image 158F002, the characters "6R probability variation" and "1st KT" are displayed, and the history icon image 158F002 corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot (shifting to the 2nd KT state after the jackpot game) is "2R probability variation". Even if the characters "2R probability change" and "1st KT" are displayed in the history icon image 158F002 corresponding to the 2R probability change big hit (shift to the 1st KT state after the big hit game), the characters "2R probability change" are displayed. Good. By doing so, the jackpot type can be easily recognized as the history information.

Further, FIG. 9-44 (E) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when a small hit occurs during the first KT state. In the first KT state, even if a small hit occurs, the numerical values of the total acquired number display image 158F001 and the history icon image 158F002 are not added and updated. If a small hit occurs during the first KT state, only one of the total acquired number display image 158F001 and the history icon image 158F002 may be updated.

After that, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-44 (F), an effect indicating the 10R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. During the 10R probability variation jackpot, the numerical value of the total number of acquisition display image 158F001 on the upper right of the screen is added and updated based on the game ball that won the jackpot during the jackpot game. After the 10R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 9-44 (F), the state is controlled to the second KT state as shown in FIG. 9-44 (G).

As shown in FIG. 9-44 (G), three history icon images 158F002 are displayed in the second KT state. The history icon image 158F002 on the left side corresponding to the first 10R probability variation jackpot was acquired by the number of prize balls during the first 10R probability variation jackpot and the small hit game during the second KT state below the characters of "big hit". The total number of prize balls is displayed as the number of winnings (“1845” in the example shown in FIG. 9-44 (G)), and the number of fluctuations until the next 6R probability variation jackpot is started is displayed (FIG. In the example shown in 9-44 (G), it is displayed as "25G"). In addition, in the history icon image 158F002 in the center corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot, the number of prize balls during the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed below the characters "hit" and "1st KT" (Fig. 9-44 (G)). In the example shown, it is displayed as "900"). In addition, in the history icon image 158F002 on the right side corresponding to the second 10R probability variation jackpot, the number of prize balls during the second 10R probability variation jackpot is displayed below the characters of "big hit" (Fig. 9-44 (G). ) Is displayed, and the number of fluctuations executed after the second 10R probability variation jackpot game is displayed as the number of fluctuations displayed (“1G” in the example shown in FIG. 9-44 (G)). .. In addition, the total number of acquired number display image 158F001 displays the total number of the three history icon images 158F002 (“4245” in the example shown in FIG. 9-44 (G)).

When a small hit occurs during the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-44 (H), a small hit image 158F003 of "small hit has occurred!" And a prize ball image of "+15" are displayed. 158F004 is displayed. Further, the number of acquired numbers of the history icon image 158F002 on the right side is updated and displayed by immediately reflecting the number of prize balls due to the small hits given during the second KT state (FIG. 9-44 (H)). In the example, "2220"). In the second KT state this time, 720 prize balls are generated. Therefore, the display mode of the history icon image 158F002 on the right side is changed to the rainbow-colored display mode. In addition, the total number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the second KT state is displayed on the total number of acquired number display image 158F001 (“4965” in the example shown in FIG. 9-44 (H)). The fluctuation number display of the history icon image 158F002 on the right side is updated and displayed every time the fluctuation display is performed after the second 10R probability variation jackpot game state (“100G” in the example of FIG. 9-44 (H)). ). In the example of FIG. 9-44 (H), the number of fluctuations in the second KT state after the second 10R probability variation jackpot game is 100G. Therefore, the display mode of the number of fluctuations display is changed to a mode in which alphanumeric characters indicating the number of fluctuations are surrounded by a circle.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-44, the number of fluctuations in the second KT state during the jackpot is displayed as the number of fluctuations, but for example, the total number of fluctuations in each second KT state is also added. , The display may be performed during the second KT state or at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of the second KT state). Further, when the state shifts to the normal state, those counts may be reset.

In this feature unit 026IW, the first state (for example, low probability state and non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state)) or low probability and first KT state in which the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. (Low probability / 1st KT state)) and 2nd state (for example, high probability and 1st KT state (high probability / 1st KT state) and high probability and 2nd KT state (high probability / 2nd KT state)) It is possible. Then, as described above, the second state is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the first state (for example, in the high probability state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the low probability state, and the frequency of jackpots is high. (See FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10). Further, in the second state, there is a large difference in probability that at least the first set value and the second set value are controlled to the advantageous state among the plurality of set values as compared with the first state (for example, in the high probability state). , The difference in the jackpot probability for each setting is large as compared with the low probability state (that is, the difference in the jackpot probability between the set values is large). See FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10). Therefore, in the second state, the difference in the jackpot probability for each setting is larger than in the first state, and the set value can be easily estimated by the player.

In a configuration in which the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, the number of fluctuations until the jackpot game state is controlled is an element that suggests the setting, but among the plurality of set values compared to the second state, If the setting is suggested in the first state where the difference between the jackpot probability between the first set value and the second set value is not large (that is, it is difficult for the player to guess the set value), it may be difficult to understand. is there. Therefore, in the second state, the feature unit 026IW is configured to display information regarding the jackpot gaming state controlled during the second state and the period until the jackpot gaming state is controlled (for example). , The history icon image 158F002 (including the acquisition number display and the fluctuation number display) corresponding to the generated jackpot is displayed. See FIG. 9-44. With such a configuration, it is possible to make an easy-to-understand setting suggestion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-44 (C), the prize ball given during the second KT state and the prize ball given in the 10R probability variation jackpot game state before being controlled to the second KT state are combined. It can be displayed as a history icon image 158F002. In this way, it is possible to preferably control the display of the prize balls acquired in the 10R probability variation jackpot game state and the display of the prize balls acquired in the second KT state. For example, the history icon image 158F002 displays the total number of prize balls acquired in the 10R probability variation jackpot before entering the second KT state and the number of prize balls acquired during the second KT state, so how many prizes are awarded in this section. It is easy to know if there was a ball.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-44 (B), the prize ball given in the 10R probability variation jackpot game state before being controlled to the second KT state can be displayed as the history icon image 158F002. In this way, the history of the awarded prize balls can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-44 (C), the prize ball by the small hit given to the history icon image 158F002 during the second KT state can be immediately updated and displayed. In this way, the history of the prize balls given in the series of sections can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-44 (C), the number of fluctuations until the next big hit is started can be updated and displayed on the history icon image 158F002. In this way, the history of the number of fluctuations executed in a series of sections (particularly, the second KT state) can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-44 (G), after the big hit game state, the first KT state (high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state)) and low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT). When controlled to the state)), the history icon image 158F002 does not display the number of fluctuations until the next big hit is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate useless information that may make the player uncomfortable by displaying the information.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-44, it is possible to display the total number of acquired number display image 158F001 in the section of the continuous jackpot gaming state different from the section targeted by the history icon image 158F002. In this way, the history of the prize balls given in the section of the continuous big hit game state can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-44 (C) and 9-44 (H), when the number of prize balls given in the second KT state is equal to or greater than the numerical value determined as a predetermined stage, the display mode of the history icon image 158F002 is staged. It is controlled to change the color according to. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player a sense of superiority by the display mode of the history icon image 158F002.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-44 (H), the display mode of the history icon image 158F002 is controlled to be changed stepwise according to the number of fluctuations in the second KT state. In this way, it is possible to easily recognize the amount of fluctuation. Further, in the second KT state in which small hits occur more frequently than in the first KT state, the longer the controlled period is, the more profit is obtained. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the large number of fluctuations. It can give a sense of superiority. Further, by comparing the number of prize balls due to the small hit with the number of fluctuations until the big hit, the player can predict the relationship between the length between the big hits and the number of prize balls due to the small hit. In addition to the number of fluctuations in the second KT state, the number of small hits may be displayed. For example, when the small hit probability is configured to be different for each setting, the set value can be estimated from the relationship between the number of fluctuations in the second KT state and the number of small hits and the number of prize balls due to small hits. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-44 (E), the prize balls given when the small hit game state is controlled during the first KT state other than the second KT state are additionally displayed on the total acquired number display image 158F001. It is controlled not to. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the current state from being mistaken for the second KT state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-44 (E), the prize ball given during the second KT state and the prize ball given during the 6R probability variation jackpot game after being controlled to the second KT state are combined. It can be displayed as a history icon image 158F002. In this way, it is possible to preferably control the display showing the prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the display indicating the prize balls acquired during the second KT state.

Next, a process of displaying the prize balls acquired in each game state will be described. 9-45 to 9-47 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display processing.

In the prize ball number display process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the super reach effect based on the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed (step 077IWS001). When the super reach effect based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is being executed, the prize ball number display such as the history icon image (including the acquisition number display and the fluctuation number display) and the total acquisition number display image is hidden. (Step 077IWS002), and the process is terminated.

In the second KT state, the frequency of executing the variable display that becomes a small hit increases, the number of times the variable display is executed increases, and every time a prize ball is given due to the occurrence of a small hit, the total number of acquisition display image 158F001 or Since the prize ball number display such as the history icon image 158F002 is updated and displayed, the interest is enhanced. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display with the super reach effect, which has a relatively long fluctuation time, is executed, the number of fluctuations does not increase during that time, and the number of prize balls does not increase due to small hits. , Since the prize ball number display is not updated (that is, the period during which the player does not feel that he / she is making a profit is extended), the player may be uncomfortable. Therefore, in the present feature unit 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-48, when the super reach effect based on the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the prize balls such as the total acquired number display image 158F001 and the history icon image 158F002 are executed. Hide the number display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that it is a period in which profits cannot be obtained even though the player is in the second KT state, and it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. it can.

Further, in the super reach effect, the display area in which the total acquired number display image 158F001, the history icon image 158F002, and the hold display 077IW002 are displayed (for example, the display area including these images can be distinguished from other display areas. As described above, the production image may be surrounded by a frame, may have a special background color, or may exist in a display device provided separately from the image display device 5). Is executed according to the mode of displaying. With such a configuration, the super reach effect can be executed without impairing the effect. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-48, the active display 077IW001 continues to be displayed even during the execution of the super reach effect based on the variable display of the second special symbol, but is not displayed like the hold display 077IW002 and the like. You may try to. Further, the feature unit 026IW is configured to hide the prize ball number display when the super reach effect is executed, but it is not limited to the super reach effect, and a specific effect (for example, step-up) is used. The prize ball number display may be hidden when the advance notice effect, the pseudo continuous effect, etc.) is being executed.

When the super reach effect based on the variable display of the second special symbol is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the prize ball number display (step 077IWS002). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the large winning opening winning flag is set (step 158FS001). If the big winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if winning the big winning opening has occurred (Y in step 158FS001)), the effect control CPU 120 resets the big winning opening winning flag (step). 158FS002), the process proceeds to step 158FS003. On the other hand, if the big winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if the winning opening is not generated (N in step 158FS001)), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 158FS008.

In step 158FS003, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the prize ball increase effect is being executed is set. If the prize ball increase effect execution flag is set (that is, if the prize ball increase effect is already being executed (Y in step 158FS003)), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 158FS009. On the other hand, if the prize ball increase effect execution flag is not set (that is, if the prize ball increase effect is not yet executed (N in step 158FS003)), the effect control CPU 120 is totally acquired in the image display device 5. An effect of increasing the number display (numerical value of the total acquired number display image 158F001) is started (step 158FS004). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the prize ball increase effect execution flag (step 158FS005). Then, the process proceeds to step 158FS006.

In step 158FS006, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current game is a 10R probability variation jackpot. When the current game is a 10R probability variation jackpot (Y in step 158FS006), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot icon display flag (step 158FS007), and proceeds to step 158FS011. On the other hand, when the current game is not a 10R probability variation jackpot (N in step 158FS006), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 158FS011 without performing the process of step 158FS007. By the processing of step 158FS006 and step 158FS007, the history icon image 158F002 is displayed every time the 10R probability variation jackpot is controlled. Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking the value of the display result specification command.

The jackpot icon (history icon image 158F002) may be displayed for each jackpot regardless of the type of jackpot. In such a case, it is desirable that the display mode of the jackpot icon (history icon image 158F002) differs depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, a flag may be set for each type of jackpot, and the set flag may be confirmed in step 158FS006 to display the history icon image 158F002 corresponding to the type of jackpot by the process of step 158FS007. Further, when the control is performed in the second KT state, the numerical value of the history icon corresponding to the immediately preceding 10R probability variation jackpot may be updated.

In step 158FS008, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the prize ball increase effect execution flag is set. When the prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (Y in step 158FS008), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 158FS009. On the other hand, when the prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (N in step 158FS008), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 158FS011.

In step 158FS009, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the prize ball increase effect has been completed. When the prize ball increase effect is completed (Y in step 158FS009), the effect control CPU 120 resets the prize ball increase effect execution flag (step 158FS010), and proceeds to step 158FS011. On the other hand, when the prize ball increase effect is not completed (N in step 158FS009), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 158FS011 without performing the process of step 158FS010. Whether or not it is the end timing of the prize ball increase effect is determined by, for example, setting a timer for measuring the effect period of the prize ball increase effect when starting the prize ball increase effect. Can be determined by checking whether or not has timed out.

In step 158FS011, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set. If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if winning the special winning opening 24 has occurred (Y in step 158FS011)), the effect control CPU 120 resets the special winning opening winning flag (that is,). Step 158FS012) and step 158FS013. On the other hand, if the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if the special winning opening 24 is not winning (N in step 158FS011)), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 158FS025.

In step 158FS013, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second KT state flag is set. If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state (Y in step 158FS013)), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 158FS014. On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (N in step 158FS013), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 158FS023.

In step 158FS023, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first KT state flag is set. When the first KT state flag is set (Y in step 158FS023), the effect control CPU 120 is set to no effect (step 158FS024), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the first KT state flag is not set (N in step 158FS023), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process without performing the process of step 158FS024.

Further, in step 158FS014, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the value of the winning number counter of the special winning opening, and proceeds to step 158FS015. The number of counts to the special winning opening is stored for each winning. In step 158FS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of prize balls in the second KT state is equal to or greater than a numerical value determined as a predetermined step. When the number of prize balls in the second KT state is equal to or greater than the numerical value determined as the predetermined step (Y in step 158FS015), the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the icon to a color according to the step. (Step 158FS016), the process proceeds to step 158FS017. On the other hand, when the number of prize balls in the second KT state is less than the numerical value determined as the predetermined step (N in step 158FS015), the effect control CPU 120 does not perform the process of step 158FS016 and steps 158FS017. Move to.

In step 158FS017, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning effect executing flag is set. When the winning effect executing flag is set (Y in step 158FS017), the effect control CPU 120 increments the winning effect waiting number counter (step 158FS018) and shifts to step 158FS025. On the other hand, when the winning effect executing flag is not set (N in step 158FS017), the effect control CPU 120 displays "small hits!" As the prize ball increase image on the screen of the image display device 5 as the prize ball increase display. The small hit image 158F003 of "" is displayed, and the prize ball image 158F004 of "+15" is displayed (step 158FS019). Then, an effect of increasing the total number of acquisitions is started (step 158FS020). Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts an effect of increasing the number of acquired icons (history icon image 158F002) (step 158FS021), sets a winning effect executing flag (step 158FS022), and proceeds to step 158FS025.

In step 158FS025, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning effect executing flag is set. When the winning effect execution flag is set (Y in step 158FS025), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 158FS026. On the other hand, if the winning effect execution flag is not set (N in step 158FS025), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

In step 158FS026, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect. When it is the end timing of the winning effect (Y in step 158FS026), the effect control CPU 120 ends various winning effects (step 158FS027) and shifts to step 158FS028. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the winning effect (N in step 158FS026), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

In step 158FS028, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0. When the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (Y in step 158FS028), the effect control CPU 120 resets the winning effect executing flag (step 158FS033) and ends the process. On the other hand, when the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (N in step 158FS028), the effect control CPU 120 sets the winning effect waiting number counter to -1 (step 158FS029) and displays the prize ball increase display (step 158FS029). Step 158FS030). Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts an effect of increasing the total acquisition number display (step 158FS031), starts an effect of increasing the icon acquisition number display (step 158FS032), and ends the process.

As shown in step-up 158FS014 to 158FS016, when the number of prize balls given in the second KT state is equal to or greater than the numerical value determined as a predetermined step, the display mode of the history icon image 158F002 is changed to a color according to the step. Is controlled by. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player a sense of superiority by the display mode of the history icon image 158F002. More specifically, since the display mode of the history icon image 158F002 changes as the number of prize balls obtained by the small hit winning in the second KT state increases, the value acquired by the color change can be known. ..

Further, as shown in steps 158FS023 and 158F024, the prize balls given when the small hit game state is controlled during the first KT state other than the second KT state are not added to the total acquired number display image 158F001. Be controlled. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the current state from being mistaken for being in the second KT state. When the small hit is controlled during the first KT state, the numerical value of the history icon image 158F002 is not updated, but the numerical value of the total acquired number display image 158F001 may be updated.

Further, in the feature unit 026IW, a case where the prize ball increase effect is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening or the special winning opening has been described. However, a game machine configured to be provided with a so-called general winning opening (a winning opening in which the variable winning ball device is not opened even if a prize is won and only a predetermined number (for example, 5) of winning balls is paid out). In the above, the prize ball increase effect may be executed even when a prize is generated in the general prize opening. In such a case, the number of prize balls won in the general winning opening during the second KT state may be added and updated to the numerical value of the history icon image 158F002 and the numerical value of the total acquired number display image 158F001.

[About a modified example of the prize ball display]
Next, a modified example of the display related to the prize ball will be described. FIG. 9-49 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode during the jackpot state and the KT state. After the 10R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 9-49 (A), the state is controlled to the second KT state as shown in FIG. 9-49 (B). Since each display is the same as the display of FIGS. 9-44 (A) and 9-44 (B) described above, description thereof will be omitted.

In the modified example, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (C), the display of the prize ball given in the jackpot game state before being controlled to the second KT state and the prize ball given during the second KT state are displayed. The display is displayed separately. Specifically, when a small hit occurs during the second KT state, a small hit image 158F003 of "small hit occurs!" Is displayed as a prize ball increase image on the screen of the image display device 5, and "+15". The prize ball image 158F004 of "" is displayed. Further, the small hit history icon image 158F005 is displayed on the right side of the history icon image 158F002. Then, the prize ball by the small hit given during the second KT state is immediately updated and displayed on the small hit history icon image 158F005. In addition, the total number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the second KT state is displayed on the total number of acquired number display image 158F001. The display timing of the small hit history icon image 158F005 may be displayed immediately after being controlled to the second KT state, and the numerical value at that time may be displayed as 0.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (C), the display mode of the small hit history icon image 158F005 changes stepwise depending on the total number of prize balls acquired during the second KT state. For example, when the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state is 0 to 200, the display mode is white, and when the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state is 201-400, the display mode is blue, and the second KT. The display mode when the total number of acquisitions in the state is 401 to 600 is red, and the display mode when the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state is 601 or more is rainbow-colored. In this way, the display mode changes every time the total number of acquisitions in the second KT state increases by 200. FIG. 9-49 (C) shows a state in which the small hit history icon image 158F005 is displayed in blue.

When the 10R probability variation jackpot is won in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-49 (D) and (E), the prize ball given in the jackpot gaming state before being controlled in the second KT state A combination effect that combines the display and the display of the prize ball given during the second KT state is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (D), the numerical value of the total number of winnings display image 158F001 showing the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game at the start of the jackpot and the prize balls acquired during the second KT state. The numerical value of the small hit history icon image 158F005 indicating the number is displayed on the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (E), these two numerical values are added up, and the total value is displayed large on the screen.

After that, in the second KT state controlled after the 10R probability variation jackpot, when the 10R probability variation jackpot is won again, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (F), during the 10R probability variation jackpot game, on the screen of the image display device 5. A jackpot production is performed. In this way, when the 10R probability variation jackpot, which is the most advantageous jackpot, is continuously won, the mode of the production may be changed.

A state when a small hit occurs in the second KT state controlled after FIG. 9-49 (F) will be described with reference to FIG. 9-49 (G). As shown in FIG. 9-49 (G), when a small hit occurs during the second KT state, the small hit image 158F003 of "small hit occurs!" Is displayed as a prize ball increase image on the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the prize ball image 158F004 of "+15" is displayed. Further, as a history icon, a history icon image 158F002, which is a combination of the first 10R probability variation jackpot and the number of prize balls in the subsequent second KT state, is displayed on the left side of the screen. Further, on the right side thereof, a history icon image 158F002 showing the number of prize balls acquired in the second 10R probability variation jackpot is displayed. Further, on the right side thereof, a small hit history icon image 158F005 showing a prize ball in the small hit acquired during the current second KT state is displayed.

In FIG. 9-49 (G), the number of prize balls in the second KT state is 720. Therefore, the small hit history icon image 158F005 is displayed in a rainbow-colored display mode. Further, in the small hit history icon image 158F005, the prize ball due to the small hit given during the second KT state is immediately updated and displayed. In addition, the total number of prize balls acquired during the two big hit games and the second KT state is displayed on the total number of acquired number display image 158F001.

As shown in FIG. 9-49 (C), the prize ball given in the big hit game state and the prize ball given in the second KT state are displayed as separate history icon image 158F002 and small hit history icon image 158F005. It is possible. In this way, it is possible to preferably control the display showing the prize balls acquired during the jackpot game state and the display indicating the prize balls acquired during the second KT state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (C), the prize ball given in the jackpot game state before being controlled to the second KT state can be displayed as the history icon image 158F002. In this way, the history of the awarded prize balls can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (C), the prize ball due to the small hit given to the small hit history icon image 158F005 during the second KT state can be immediately updated and displayed. In this way, the history of the prize balls given in the series of sections can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-49, it is possible to display the total acquired number display image 158F001 in the section of the continuous big hit gaming state different from the section targeted by the history icon image 158F002 and the small hit history icon image 158F005. In this way, the history of the prize balls given in the section of the continuous big hit game state can be recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-49 (C) and 9-49, the small hit history icon image 158F005 is displayed when the number of prize balls given in the second KT state is equal to or greater than the numerical value determined as a predetermined stage. The aspect changes to a color according to the stage. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player a sense of superiority depending on the display mode of the history image.

Also in the modified example, the prize balls given when the small hit game state is controlled during the first KT state other than the second KT state are controlled so as not to be additionally displayed on the total acquired number display image 158F001. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the person from misunderstanding that he / she is in the second KT state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (C), the display of the prize ball given in the jackpot game state before being controlled in the second KT state and the display of the prize ball given in the second KT state are displayed. It can be displayed separately. Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-49 (D) and 9-49 (E), the display of the prize ball given in the jackpot game state before being controlled to the second KT state and the prize ball given during the second KT state. A combination effect that combines with the display of is executed. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving a special feeling by the combination production.

The combination effect as a special effect may be executed when the number of prize balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and may not be executed when the number of prize balls is less than a predetermined number. Specifically, when the number of prize balls given during the second KT state is 600 or more, the combination effect is executed, and when the number of prize balls given during the second KT state is less than 600, the combination is performed. You may not execute the production. In this way, when the number of prize balls given is less than a predetermined number, the combination effect is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the stress of repeating the combination effect a plurality of times, and when the number of prize balls given is more than a predetermined number. At one point, the fun of the game can be improved by giving a special feeling through the combination production.

In addition, the display of the prize ball given in the jackpot game state before being controlled to the second KT state, the display of the prize ball given in the second KT state, and the jackpot game state after being controlled to the second KT state. The display of the prize balls given in may be displayed separately. That is, when a big hit is further generated from the state of FIG. 9-49 (C), the history icon image 158F002 corresponding to the big hit may be displayed on the right side of the small hit history icon image 158F005. Then, the display of the prize ball given in the jackpot game state before being controlled to the second KT state, the display of the prize ball given in the second KT state, and the jackpot game state after being controlled to the second KT state. You may execute the combination effect which combines with the display of the prize ball given in. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving a special feeling by the combination production.

FIG. 9-50 is a flowchart showing a variable display start waiting process (step S170) in the effect control process process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 077IWS811). When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration screen is being displayed is set (step 077IWS820) and sets it. If so, the image display device 5 controls to end the display of the demonstration screen (step 077IWS821), and resets the demo display flag (step 077IWS822). Next, the effect control CPU 120 resets the variation pattern command reception flag (step 077IWS812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step 077IWS171) (step 077IWS813).

When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the demo display flag is set (step 077IWS823).

If the demo display flag is not set (N in step 077IWS823), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the demo designation command reception flag is set (step 077IWS824). Then, when the demo designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the demonstration screen (step 077IWS825), and sets the demo display flag (step 077IWS826). ). Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the demo designation command reception flag (step 077IWS827).

When the demo display flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 077IWS828). Then, when the second KT state flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the history display operation for displaying the game history has been performed by the player (step 077IWS829), and displays the history. When the operation is performed, the history information (for example, the history icon image 158F002 as shown in FIG. 9-44) from the time when the power is turned on to the operation time is displayed according to the history display operation (step 077IWS830).

In the history information display, for example, when the stick controller 122 is tilted, the history icon image 158F002 that cannot be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is slid and displayed (that is, scrolled), and the power is turned on. All history information from time to operation time can be viewed.

In this feature unit 026IW, history information can be displayed while the demonstration screen is displayed, but history information is displayed only in the second KT state, and in the normal state (low probability state and non-KT state). , It is configured so that history information is not displayed. With this configuration, only the player who has played a certain degree of game can confirm the history information, and the player's willingness to play can be aroused.

In the example of the feature unit 026IW, the history information can be displayed while the demonstration screen is displayed, but the history information is not limited to the state where the demonstration screen is displayed, and during the big hit game or during the big hit game. The history information may be displayed when the player performs a history display operation using the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 at the end, at the end of the probability change state, or the like. Further, a second image display device may be provided in addition to the image display device 5, and the second image display device may display the history information. By providing the second image display device, the history information can be displayed at any time regardless of the game state even during the variable display or the big hit game.

[Other variants]
Next, modified examples, feature points, and the like of the embodiments described above are listed below.

In the above embodiment, various patterns can be considered as a method of displaying the history icon depending on how far the section is to be displayed. For example, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, a history icon may be displayed for each jackpot, or for a jackpot that shifts to the second KT state, the jackpot and the second KT state may be set as one section. One section may be from the second KT state to the next big hit. More specifically, the history icon may be displayed by dividing the section such as "10R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state + 6R probability variation jackpot" and "10R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state + 4R normal jackpot". Further, the history icon may be displayed by dividing the section such as "10R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state + 10R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state" and "4R normal jackpot". Further, the history icon may be displayed by dividing the section such as "10R probability variation jackpot", "2nd KT state + 10R probability variation jackpot", and "2nd KT state + 4R normal jackpot". Also, even if the history icon is displayed by dividing the section such as "10R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state + 10R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state + 6R probability variation jackpot", "10R probability variation jackpot + 2nd KT state", "4R normal jackpot". Good. That is, it is desirable to divide the section before and after the big hit in the second KT state, before and after the big hit not in the second KT state, before and after the second KT state, and the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, when a plurality of big hits are consecutive (so-called consecutive villas), the result display displayed at the end of the consecutive villa shows the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit and the second KT state. The number of prize balls won only and the total number of prizes won may be displayed separately on the screen. As a result, it is possible to recognize how many game balls have been acquired in which game state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the interval of the number of acquisitions in which the history icon is changed stepwise may be as follows. For example, the interval of the number of acquisitions in the previous jackpot + the number of acquisitions in the second KT state + the number of acquisitions in the jackpot after the end of the second KT state may be changed. Further, it may be a section other than that, and the number of acquisitions for changing may be different depending on the section.

Further, in the above embodiment, the prize balls won in the general winning opening may be added as the number of winnings. Then, at the end of the big hit when the second KT state ends, the combination effect may be executed in consideration of the number of prize balls in the general winning opening.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main display device and the sub display device may be provided, and the prize ball display process may be executed on either one or both display devices.

Further, in the above embodiment, the start timing of the combination effect may be a timing other than the timing at the start of the big hit. For example, the start timing of the combination effect may be the timing at the end of the second KT state (before the start of the big hit) or the timing at the end of the big hit that does not enter the second KT state. In the case of a big hit that does not enter the second KT state, the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit may be displayed together with the history icon.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the number of prize balls acquired in the second KT state is less than a predetermined number, the combination effect may not be executed. Even in such a case, it is desirable to display the total number of acquisitions. Further, the display mode of the total acquisition number display may be different depending on whether the combination effect is executed or not. Further, in the one that executes the combination effect regardless of the number of prize balls in the second KT state, the mode of the combination effect may be different depending on the difference in the total number of acquisitions. The predetermined number of prize balls is the following value. For example, in the case of a small hit of about 1/4 before a big hit of about 1/48 occurs, about 12 small hits occur. Therefore, considering that one small hit will win approximately two prizes, it is assumed that 12 times x 2 x 15 = 360 will be paid out. Therefore, the average value may be about 360 as a predetermined number.

Further, in the above embodiment, the player may be able to select whether or not to display the history icon. For example, during a demonstration or a jackpot game, whether or not to display the history icon may be selected by operating an operation means that can be operated by the player, such as a push button or a cross key.

Further, in the above embodiment, when there are more prize balls than the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one small hit game state normally assumed, the display mode and the sound mode of the effect are changed. It may be. For example, if there are 30 prize balls with 2 prizes in the special prize opening in one small hit, when there are 3 or more prizes in the special prize opening, the effect is different from the usual one. It may be a display mode or a sound mode.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 9-10) is compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9-9). The winning probability of a small hit is about 10 times. That is, it is configured so that the small hit probability becomes high when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. When the configuration of the feature unit 026IW (for example, when the initialization process is executed) is executed in the gaming machine having a configuration having a high small hit probability (for example, the same degree as when the variation display of the second special symbol in this example is executed). Is displayed as the initial display of the special symbol, the symbol corresponding to the common deviation or the symbol corresponding to the small hit, regardless of the set value, and when the set value is changed, it is set after the change. In any case of the set values, the symbol corresponding to the common deviation or the symbol corresponding to the small hit may be displayed as the initial display of the special symbol).

For example, a jackpot game is played based on the fact that the game ball is opened in the predetermined winning opening and the game ball is won in the V winning opening provided inside the winning opening. It is a so-called type 2 pachinko machine or a type 1 type 2 mixed type pachinko machine that is controlled by the state, and has a high small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed without providing the probability change state ( That is, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed by the configuration (the probability that the accessory (blade) is released due to the occurrence of a small hit) and the configuration in which the variation display result of the first special symbol does not come off. It is possible to realize a gaming machine with a high probability of small hits. Further, in this case, for example, in a 1-type / 2-type mixed pachinko machine, in order to adjust so that the probability of V winning is not too high, a plurality of types of small hits are provided, and V winning is difficult or impossible. The probability of occurrence of a small hit of a certain type may be increased.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are provided, but the game machine is not limited to such a configuration and is provided with only one type. The configuration of this feature unit 026IW (for example, when the initialization process is executed, the symbol corresponding to the common loss or the symbol corresponding to the small hit is the special symbol regardless of the set value set. It is displayed as the initial display, and when the set value is changed, the symbol corresponding to the common loss or the symbol corresponding to the small hit is the initial display of the special symbol regardless of the setting value set after the change. The displayed configuration, etc.) may be applied. For example, in the case of the above-mentioned configuration of the so-called type 2 pachinko machine, it is possible to use only one type of special symbol.

As described above, in the feature unit 026IW, the identification information (for example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is variably displayed, and the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display result. Based on this, the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), and as a variable display result, a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) having a lower advantage than the specific display result is derived and displayed. A plurality of devices that are controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) based on the fact and include a first set value (for example, a set value "1") and a second set value (for example, a set value "6"). A game machine that can be set to any of the set values of, and when it is not controlled to an advantageous state or a special state, a predetermined display result (for example, a loss) different from the specific display result and the special display result as a variable display result The symbol) is derived and displayed, and the extraction means for extracting a random number value (for example, a random number for hit determination) (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the process of step 072IWS044) and the random number value extracted by the extraction means are variable. Determining means for determining the variable display result based on the determination value corresponding to the display result (the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 052IWS60A and 052IWS64A) and the stored contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped. (For example, a RAM 102 (backup RAM)) and an initialization means for executing an initialization process for initializing the stored contents of the storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410). , And the range of the random number value is common to all the set values (for example, [0 to 65536], see FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10), and the determination value is A specific judgment value corresponding to a specific display result (for example, a judgment value corresponding to a big hit), a special judgment value corresponding to a special display result (for example, a judgment value corresponding to a small hit), and a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined display result. The number of specific judgment values including the judgment value (for example, the judgment value corresponding to the deviation) is larger when the set setting value is the second set value than when it is the first set value. (For example, the set value "6" has a larger number of judgment values corresponding to the jackpot than the set value "1". See FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10), and the number of special judgment values is set. The set value is the same in all cases (for example, the determination value corresponding to the small hit is the same in any of the set values "1" to "6". FIG. 9- 9. The number of predetermined determination values is larger when the set value is the first set value than when it is the second set value (for example, the set value "1"). There are more judgment values corresponding to deviations than the set value "6". (See FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10), the storage means can specify information for redisplaying the variable display result that was displayed when the power supply to the game machine was stopped (for example, the variable display result can be specified). Information) can be retained, and the information is erased from the storage means when the initialization process is executed by the initialization means and when the set value is changed (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410). , And the part that executes the process of step S21TM1410 via the setting change mode of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620), when the initialization process is executed by the initialization means, the set value is common to all cases. The predetermined display result is displayed as the initial display of the identification information (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410. See FIG. 9-6 (2)), and when the set value is changed, it is set after the change. A common predetermined display result is displayed as the initial display of the identification information regardless of the set value (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410 through the setting change mode of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620. FIG. 9; -6 (2)) may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being specified whether or not the setting has been changed, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified.

Further, in the feature unit 026IW, when the initialization process is executed by the initialization means, the special display result (for example, the small hit symbol) that is common to all the set values is the identification information. It is displayed as an initial display (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410. See FIG. 9-6 (3)). When the set value is changed, which case is the set value set after the change? A common special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is displayed as an initial display of identification information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410 through the setting change mode of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620. FIG. -6 (3)) may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being specified whether or not the setting has been changed, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified.

Further, in the feature unit 026IW, the predetermined determination value is provided when the set value is the first set value, but is not provided when the set value is the second set value (for example, the set value " In "1", the judgment value corresponding to the loss is set, while in the set value "6", the judgment value corresponding to the loss is not set. See FIG. 9-10), the storage means is for the gaming machine. Information for displaying the variable display result that was displayed when the power supply is stopped (for example, information that can identify the variable display result) can be retained, and the information is initialized by the initialization means. When it is executed and when the set value is changed, it is erased from the storage means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410, and the process of step S21TM1410 is executed via the setting change mode of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620. (Part), when the initialization process is executed by the initialization means, a common predetermined display result is displayed as the initial display of the identification information regardless of the set value (for example, the CPU 103 is in step S21TM1410). (See Fig. 9-6 (2)), when the set value is changed, the predetermined display result that is common to all the set values set after the change is the initial identification information. It may be displayed as a display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410 via the setting change mode of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620. See FIG. 9-6 (2)). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being specified whether or not the setting has been changed, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified.

Further, in the feature unit 026IW, the predetermined determination value is provided when the set value is the first set value, but is not provided when the set value is the second set value (for example, the set value " In "1", the judgment value corresponding to the loss is set, while in the set value "6", the judgment value corresponding to the loss is not set. See FIG. 9-10), the storage means is for the gaming machine. Information for displaying the variable display result that was displayed when the power supply is stopped (for example, information that can identify the variable display result) can be retained, and the information is initialized by the initialization means. When it is executed and when the set value is changed, it is erased from the storage means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410, and the process of step S21TM1410 is executed via the setting change mode of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620. (Part), when the initialization process is executed by the initialization means, the common special display result is displayed as the initial display of the identification information regardless of the set value (for example, the CPU 103 is in step S21TM1410). (See Fig. 9-6 (3)), when the set value is changed, the special display result that is common to all the set values set after the change is the initial identification information. It may be displayed as a display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S21TM1410 via the setting change mode of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620. See FIG. 9-6 (3)). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being specified whether or not the setting has been changed, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is a gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). When the initialization process is executed by the initialization means, a predetermined display result common to the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed as the initial display (see, for example, FIG. 9-6 (2)). ) May be done. With such a configuration, the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified can be reduced.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is a gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). When the initialization process is executed by the initialization means, the special display result common to the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed as the initial display (see, for example, FIG. 9-6 (3)). ) May be done. With such a configuration, the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified can be reduced.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is a gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Therefore, a common predetermined display result among the plurality of predetermined display results may be displayed as the initial display in the first identification information and the second identification information (see, for example, FIG. 9-6 (2)). .. With such a configuration, the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified can be reduced.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is a gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Therefore, the common special display result among the plurality of special display results may be displayed as the initial display in the first identification information and the second identification information (see, for example, FIG. 9-6 (3)). .. With such a configuration, the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified can be reduced.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is a gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). When the set setting value is a specific setting value (for example, the setting value "6"), the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are variable. As a result, the predetermined display result is not derived and displayed, but on the other hand, the predetermined display result can be derived and displayed as the variable display result (for example, in the variable display of the second special symbol at the set value "6", the deviation is not derived and displayed. , In the variable display of the first special symbol, the deviation may be derived and displayed). With such a configuration, the possibility that the state of the game is misidentified can be reduced.

Further, according to the present feature unit 026IW, it is possible to set a set value of any one of a plurality of set values (for example, "1" to "6"), and an advantageous state (for example, advantageous state) for the player. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state, and has a first state (for example, a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-probability)) in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on a set value. KT state: normal state) and low probability and first KT state (low probability / first KT state)), and the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the set value, and there are multiple cases compared to the first state. Of the set values, the second state (for example, high probability and first KT state (high probability / first KT state)) or high has a large difference in the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state between at least the first set value and the second set value. A control means that can be controlled to a probabilistic and second KT state (high probability / second KT state), and in the second state, an advantageous state controlled during the second state and a period until the advantageous state is controlled. It is provided with a display means capable of displaying information related to the above (for example, a history icon image 158F002 (including a display of the number of acquisitions and a display of the number of fluctuations) corresponding to the jackpot that has occurred is displayed. According to such a configuration, since the specific display is displayed in the second state, which is more likely to be controlled in the advantageous state than in the first state, it is possible to make an easy-to-understand setting suggestion.

Further, according to the present feature unit 026IW, the second state is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the first state (for example, in the high probability state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the low probability state, and the frequency of jackpots is high. Is high. See FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make an easy-to-understand setting suggestion.

Further, according to the present feature unit 026IW, the difference in the probability that the second state is controlled to the advantageous state for each setting is larger than that in the first state (for example, in the high probability state, the setting is made as compared with the low probability state. There is a large difference in the jackpot probability for each. See FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make an easy-to-understand setting suggestion.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the display means can display information on the advantageous state and the period until the advantageous state is controlled, and can also display information on the type of the advantageous state (). For example, the history icon image 158F002 in the mode corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. See FIG. 9-44). According to such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize the type of the controlled advantageous state and the variable display number until the controlled advantageous state is controlled.

Further, according to the present feature unit 026IW, a special state control means capable of controlling a special state (for example, a small hit game state) which is a state different from the advantageous state is provided, and a second state (for example, a high probability and a second KT) is provided. The state (high probability / second KT state) is the first state (for example, low probability state and non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state)) or low probability and first KT state (low probability / first KT state). )) Is easier to control in a special state. According to such a configuration, the player can predict the relationship between the game value given in the special state and the variable display number of times until the game is controlled to the advantageous state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 026IW, the display means can display information in a specific mode when the period until it is controlled to the advantageous state is a specific period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the history icon image 158F002). The display mode changes stepwise according to the number of fluctuations (see FIG. 9-44 (H)). According to such a configuration, the player can intuitively recognize the length of the variable display number until the advantageous state is controlled.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol) are executed in parallel. A possible variable display execution means, a special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) that is more easily controlled to a special state than a non-special state, and an advantageous state controlled during the special state. A display means capable of displaying a specific display including information on the game value that has been played and information on the variable display number of times until the advantageous state is controlled (for example, history icon image 158F002 corresponding to the jackpot that has occurred (display of the number of acquisitions). (Including the display of the number of fluctuations) and the specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect) (see FIGS. 9-44), and the first identification information is variable in a special state. The variable display of either the display or the variable display of the second identification information is more easily controlled to a special state than the other variable display (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol is the variable display of the first special symbol. Compared to the above, it is more likely to be an opportunity to be controlled to the small hit game state. See FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10), and in the special state, the display of the specific display when the specific effect is executed in connection with one of the variable displays. (For example, the portion where the effect control CPU executes steps 077IWS001 and S003. See FIG. 9-45). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable by appropriately displaying the information.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the reach effect is executed as a specific effect when the reach state is reached, and the reach effect is not controlled to a special state at least when the reach effect is executed (for example, the reach effect is executed). The fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, and no small hit occurs during that time). With such a configuration, the player can be focused on the reach effect.

Further, according to the present feature unit 026IW, the non-special state includes at least a specific state (for example, the first KT state) in which the variable display of the second identification information is more likely to be executed than the non-specific state, and the display means is specified. Information corresponding to being controlled by the state can be displayed, and the information does not include information regarding the variable display number of times until the state is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, 6R probability change that triggers the transition to the first KT state). The history icon image 158F002 corresponding to the jackpot does not include the fluctuation number display. See FIGS. 9-44 (G) and (H). With such a configuration, useless information can be eliminated.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the specific effect is executed in a mode of displaying the effect image even in the display area where the information is displayed (for example, when the super reach effect is executed, the total number of acquired images is displayed. The display of the number of prize balls such as 158F001 and the history icon image 158F002 is hidden. In addition, the super reach effect displays the effect image even in the display area where the total acquired number display image 158F001 and the history icon image 158F002 are displayed. (See FIG. 9-48 (B)). According to such a configuration, a specific effect can be executed without impairing the effect.

Further, according to the present feature unit 026IW, the display means can display the game value given in the special state and the game value given in the advantageous state before being controlled by the special state. For example, the prize ball given during the second KT state and the prize ball given in the 10R probability variation jackpot game state before being controlled to the second KT state can be collectively displayed as the history icon image 158F002. -44 (C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably control the display showing the game value given during the special state and the display showing the game value given during the advantageous state.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (2)

The identification information is variably displayed, and based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display result is a special display that is less advantageous than the specific display result. It is a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values including the first set value and the second set value by controlling the special state based on the result derived and displayed.
When not controlled by the advantageous state and the special state, a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result.
Extraction means to extract random values and
A determination means for determining a variable display result based on the random number value extracted by the extraction means and a determination value corresponding to the variable display result.
A storage means that can retain the stored contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped.
An initialization means for executing an initialization process for initializing the stored contents of the storage means is provided.
The range of the random value is common regardless of the set value.
The determination value includes a specific determination value corresponding to the specific display result, a special determination value corresponding to the special display result, and a predetermined determination value corresponding to the predetermined display result.
The number of the specific determination values is larger when the set value is the second set value than when it is the first set value.
The number of the special determination values is the same regardless of the set value.
The number of the predetermined determination values is larger when the set value is the first set value than when the set value is the second set value.
The storage means can hold information for redisplaying the variable display result that was displayed when the power supply to the game machine was stopped.
The information is erased from the storage means when the initialization process is executed by the initialization means and when the set value is changed.
When the initialization process is executed by the initialization means, the predetermined display result that is common to all the set values is displayed as the initial display of the identification information.
When the set value is changed, the predetermined display result common to all the set values set after the change is displayed as the initial display of the identification information. The identification information is variably displayed, and based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display result is a special display that is less advantageous than the specific display result. It is a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values including the first set value and the second set value by controlling the special state based on the result derived and displayed.
When not controlled by the advantageous state and the special state, a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result.
Extraction means to extract random values and
A determination means for determining a variable display result based on the random number value extracted by the extraction means and a determination value corresponding to the variable display result.
A storage means that can retain the stored contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped.
An initialization means for executing an initialization process for initializing the stored contents of the storage means is provided.
The range of the random value is common regardless of the set value.
The determination value includes a specific determination value corresponding to the specific display result, a special determination value corresponding to the special display result, and a predetermined determination value corresponding to the predetermined display result.
The number of the specific determination values is larger when the set value is the second set value than when it is the first set value.
The number of the special determination values is the same regardless of the set value.
The predetermined determination value is provided when the set value is the first set value, but is not provided when the set value is the second set value.
The storage means can hold information for redisplaying the variable display result that was displayed when the power supply to the game machine was stopped.
The information is erased from the storage means when the initialization process is executed by the initialization means and when the set value is changed.
When the initialization process is executed by the initialization means, the predetermined display result that is common to all the set values is displayed as the initial display of the identification information.
When the set value is changed, the predetermined display result common to all the set values set after the change is displayed as the initial display of the identification information.

Images